Menu

Acts 27:21 — Word Study

Depth

N1904πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

BSAMuchpolus alsode time without foodasitia [in a state of fasting] there beinghuparchō at that timetote having stood uphistēmi <the>ho PaulPaulos [the apostle, a servant of Christ] inen midstmesos of themautos he said;legō It was necessary [for you]dei indeed,men Oō men,anēr [sirs, gentlemen] having been obedientpeitharcheō [listened to me, obeyed my counsel] to meegō not to have set sailanagō fromapo <the>ho Crete,Krētē [to have remained in Crete, avoiding the storm] to have incurredkerdainō [gained, avoided] thente <the>ho disasterhubris [harm, mistreatment] thisohutos andkai <the>ho loss.zēmia [damage, injury]

Word
Listen & take awayActs 27
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 21 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (zēmia) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Acts 27:21quick helps
In a sentencePaul addresses the crew after a long fast, advising them they should have heeded his warning against sailing from Crete to avoid disaster.
Who is speakingPaul, the apostle, stands up among the men to give his counsel.
Where we areIn the midst of a perilous sea journey, where the crew faces a dire situation.
The hard wordἀσιτίας
Take awayHeeding wise counsel can prevent significant loss.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectἵστημι verbὑπάρχω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 31 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Acts 27:21

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Paul's Advice During the Stormgenerated

20When neither sun nor stars appeared for many days and the great storm continued to batter us, we abandoned all hope of being saved.
21After the men had gone a long time without food, Paul stood up among them and said, “Men, you should have followed my advice not to sail from Crete. Then you would have averted this disaster and loss.
22But now I urge you to keep up your courage, because you will not experience any loss of life, but only of the ship.
23For just last night an angel of God, whose I am and whom I serve, stood beside me

Acts 27:21 describes a moment when Paul, after a lengthy period without food, addresses the men on the ship. He expresses that they should have followed his advice not to set sail from Crete, indicating that their decision led to the current perilous situation. This highlights Paul's role as a leader and advisor during a crisis, similar to how wise counsel is often sought in times of trouble.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Acts 27:33–35Right up to daybreak, Paul kept urging them all to eat: “Today is your fourteenth day in constant suspense, without taking any food.
2Psalm 107:5–6They were hungry and thirsty; their soul fainted within them.
3Acts 27:9–10By now much time had passed, and the voyage had already become dangerous because it was after the Fast. So Paul advised them,
4Genesis 42:22And Reuben responded, “Didn’t I tell you not to sin against the boy? But you would not listen. Now we must account for his blood!”

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 4 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ἀσιτίας, asitiagenerated

The word ἀσιτία (asitia) means fasting or a state of going without food. It is derived from the root meaning a lack of food and is used in this context to indicate the crew's prolonged abstinence due to the storm's severity.

In this verse, it emphasizes the seriousness of their situation, as they had not eaten for a long time, which would have contributed to their weakened state and heightened the urgency of Paul's warning.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as: 'After the men had gone a long time without food, Paul stood up among them and said, “Men, you should have followed my advice not to sail from Crete. Then you would have averted this disaster and loss.”' This wording is consistent across several translations, including the KJV and ASV.

However, some versions differ in their choice of words. For instance, ASV uses 'long without food' while YLT states 'long fasting,' and WEB opts for 'long without food.' These variations reflect different approaches to conveying the same idea.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main action of the verse is governed by the finite verb εἶπεν, he said, which introduces Paul's speech. The structure includes a noun phrase indicating the subject ('Paul') and several clauses that elaborate on his advice and the consequences of ignoring it.

The sentence is complex, with multiple clauses detailing the conditions and outcomes of the situation, indicating a clear cause-and-effect relationship between their actions and the resulting disaster.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἀσιτία does not have a direct equivalent in the Septuagint but relates to the Hebrew term for fasting, which signifies abstaining from food for spiritual or practical reasons. This concept appears in various contexts throughout the Old Testament.

The usage of ἀσιτία in this verse highlights the seriousness of the men's situation, reflecting a common theme in biblical narratives where fasting is associated with dire circumstances.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Acts 27:21 tells us that after a long time without food, Paul stood up among the men on the ship and advised them that they should have listened to him and not sailed from Crete. He warned that their decision led to disaster and loss.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does Paul mean by saying they should have followed his advice?

Paul is expressing that had the crew listened to him, they could have avoided the current perilous situation they find themselves in.

Why were the men without food for so long?

The men were likely without food due to the severity of the storm, which made it difficult to eat or prepare food.

What does the term 'disaster and loss' refer to?

It refers to the harm and damage that the crew is currently facing as a result of their decision to sail despite Paul's warning.

How does this passage illustrate the importance of heeding wise counsel?

This passage shows that listening to wise advice can prevent negative outcomes, as Paul's warning could have saved the crew from their current predicament.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what areas of my life do I need to be more receptive to wise counsel?
  2. How can I apply the lessons from Paul's advice to my own decision-making processes?
  3. What are some consequences I have faced due to ignoring wise advice?
  4. How can I support others in making better decisions based on sound counsel?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

John Chrysostom comments on Paul's response to the crew, emphasizing his desire for them to heed his wisdom for future decisions.

John ChrysostomHomily on Acts 53 c. 347–407
Then after so great a storm he does not speak as insultingly over them, but as wishing that at any rate he might be believed for the future.
Early Church Fathers on Acts 27 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Acts 27:21 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

But after long abstinence,.... From food, not for want of it, as appears from what follows, Acts 27:36 nor in a religious way, in order to obtain the favour of God; but either for want of appetite,

Read John Gill on Acts 27 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

But after long abstinence Paul stood forth in the midst of them, and said, Sirs, ye should have hearkened unto me, and not have loosed from Crete, and to have gained this harm and loss. But after long abstinence.

Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 27 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

After long abstinence: these did not abstain from their meals for any want; for they had sufficient provision, as appears, ; nor because the storm or tempest tossing the ship, and them in it, took away their stomach, for the sea men, at least, were not so long troubled with that sea sickness: but: 1. Their continually being employed, working for their lives. Or: 2. Their fear of perisiting, and sense of a future state, might take up their thoughts so effectually, that they minded nothing else. Hence it hath been said, that whosoever cannot pray should go to sea, and there he would learn it; for in their affliction they will seek me early, saith the Lord, . Ye should have hearkened unto me…

Read Matthew Poole on Acts 27 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

21 But after long abstinence Paul stood forth in the midst of them, and said, Sirs, ye should have hearkened unto me, and not have loosed from Crete, and to have gained this harm and loss. Ver. 21. Gained this harm] i.e. Prevented it. Prevision (foresight) is the best way of prevention, but for lack of prudent forecast "men pass on and are punished." Leo cassibus irretitus dixit, si praescivissem. Men might by wisdom redeem many miseries.

Read John Trapp on Acts 27 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(21) After long abstinence . . .—We find from Acts 27:35-38 that there was still a fair supply of food on board, but. as they could not tell how long it might be before they reached a harbour, the crew, amounting, with passengers, to two hundred and seventy-six men (Acts 27:37), had been naturally put on reduced rations, and the storm, and the sacrifice which they had been obliged to make of all their goods that could be spared probably made cooking all but impossible. Paul stood forth in the midst of them.—The narrative implies that while others had burst into the wailing cries of despair, calling, we may believe, like the sailors in Jonah 1:5, “every man unto his god,” the Apostle had…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 27 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 21. After long abstinence] Πολληςδεασιτιαςὑπαρχουσης. Mr. Wakefield connects this with the preceding verse, and translates it thus: Especially as there was a great scarcity of provisions. But this by no means can agree with what is said, Acts 27:34-38. The vessel was a corn vessel; and they had not as yet thrown the wheat into the sea, see Acts 27:38. And we find they had food sufficient to eat, but were discouraged, and so utterly hopeless of life that they had no appetite for food: besides, the storm was so great that it is not likely they could dress any thing. Have gained this harm and loss.] It seems strange to talk of gaining a loss, but it is a correct rendering of the…

Read AdamClarke on Acts 27 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

21. But after long abstinence] As this sentence stands in A. V. it seems to indicate that the Apostle had been observing this long abstinence before he spake to his companions. The Gk. means that everybody on board had been without food for a long time. Read (with R. V.) “when they had been long without food.” This was in consequence of the excitement which made it impossible to eat, as well as the condition of the vessel which made the preparation of food very difficult. They had been living on anything that happened to be attainable, and that had been very little.and not have loosed [R. V. set sail] from Crete] His exhortation had been that they should stay at Fair Havens, even though it…

Read Cambridge on Acts 27 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

But after long abstinence - By the violence of the storm, by their long continued labor, and by their apprehension of danger, they had a long time abstained from food.

Read Albert Barnes on Acts 27 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

After the men had gone a long time without food, Paul stood up among them and said, “Men, you should have followed my advice not to sail from Crete. Then you would have averted this disaster and loss.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

When they had been long without food, Paul stood up in the middle of them and said, “Sirs, you should have listened to me, and not have set sail from Crete and have gotten this injury and loss.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

After the men had gone a long time without food, Paul stood up among them and said, “Men, you should have followed my advice not to sail from Crete. Then you would have averted this disaster and loss.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Since many of them had no desire to eat, Paul stood up among them and said, “Men, you should have listened to me and not put out to sea from Crete, thus avoiding this damage and loss.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

But after long abstinence Paul stood forth in the midst of them, and said, Sirs, ye should have hearkened unto me, and not have loosed from Crete, and to have gained this harm and loss.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And when they had been long without food, then Paul stood forth in the midst of them, and said, Sirs, ye should have hearkened unto me, and not have set sail from Crete, and have gotten this injury and loss.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And when they had been long without food, then Paul stood forth in the midst of them, and said, Sirs, ye should have hearkened unto me, and not have set sail from Crete, and have gotten this injury and loss.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

But after long abstinence, Paul stood forth in the midst of them, and said, Sirs, ye should have hearkened to me, and not have loosed from Crete, and to have gained this harm and loss.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

But after long abstinece, Paul stood forth in the mids of them, and said, Syrs, ye should haue hearkened to me, and not haue loosed from Candie: so should ye haue gained this hurt and losse.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And when they had been a long while without taking food, Paul then standing up in the midst of them said, Ye ought, O men, to have hearkened to me, and not have made sail from Crete and have gained this disaster and loss.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

And there having been long fasting, then Paul having stood in the midst of them, said, 'It behoved [you], indeed, O men — having hearkened to me — not to set sail from Crete, and to save this hurt and damage;

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

And there having been long fasting, then Paul having stood in the midst of them, said, “It was necessary, indeed, O men—having listened to me—not to set sail from Crete, and to save this hurt and damage;

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

When they had gone long without food, then Paul stood up among the sailors and said, “Men, you should have listened to me, and not have set sail from Crete, so as to get this injury and loss.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And after they had fasted a long time, Paul standing forth in the midst of them, said: You should indeed, O ye men, have hearkened unto me, and not have loosed from Crete, and have gained this harm and loss.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Nobody had eaten anything for a long time. Then Paul stood before them and told them, “Men, you should have listened to me and not sailed from Crete. Then you could have avoided all this hardship and loss.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And when they had been without food for a long time, Paul got up among them and said, Friends, it would have been better if you had given attention to me and not gone sailing out from Crete, to undergo this damage and loss.

Word by word, the decisions they made

σταθεὶςhistēmi having stood up G2476 3 different renderings
stoodASV BSB FBV GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
standingDBY DRA
having stoodLSV YLT
μέσῳmesos midst G3319 2 different renderings
midstASV DBY DRA KJV LSV NWB RVA YLT
middleWEB
Ἔδειdei It was necessary [for you] G1163 2 different renderings
oughtDBY
it was necessaryLSV
ἄνδρες,anēr men, G435 2 different renderings
menBSB DBY DRA FBV LSV MSB NETB ULB YLT
sirsASV KJV NWB RVA WEB
ἀνάγεσθαιanagō to have set sail G321 4 different renderings
set sailASV LSV RVA ULB WEB YLT
sailBSB DBY MSB
sailedFBV
sailingBBE
κερδῆσαίkerdainō to have incurred G2770 2 different renderings
gainedDBY DRA GNV KJV NWB
avoidedFBV

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseτεalsoclausenoun phrase · subjectΠολλῆςMuchἀσιτίαςtime without foodverbὑπαρχούσηςthere beingclauseadverbialτότεat that timeadverbialσταθεὶςhaving stood upnoun phrase · subject-ΠαῦλοςPaulprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνinnoun phraseμέσῳmidstαὐτῶνof themverbεἶπενhe saidclausenoun phraseOἄνδρεςmenclauseμένindeedclauseverbἜδειIt behooved [you]noun phrase · subjectclauseclauseclause · adverbialverbπειθαρχήσαντάςhaving been obedientobjectμοιto meadverbialμὴnotverbἀνάγεσθαιto have set sailprepositional phrase · adverbialἀπὸfromnoun phraseτῆς-ΚρήτηςCreteτεthenclauseverbκερδῆσαίto have incurrednoun phrase · objectnoun phrasenoun phraseτὴνtheὕβρινdisasterταύτηνthisκαὶandnoun phraseτὴν-ζημίανloss

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et cum multa jejunatio fuisset, tunc stans Paulus in medio eorum, dixit : Oportebat quidem, o viri, audito me, non tollere a Creta, lucrique facere injuriam hanc et jacturam.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܟܕ ܐܢܫ ܡܕܡ ܠܐ ܡܣܬܝܒܪ ܗܘܐ ܗܝܕܝܢ ܩܡ ܦܘܠܘܣ ܒܝܢܬܗܘܢ ܘܐܡܪ ܐܠܘ ܐܬܛܦܝܣܬܘܢ ܠܝ ܓܒܪܐ ܠܐ ܪܕܝܢ ܗܘܝܢ ܡܢ ܩܪܛܐ ܘܡܬܚܣܟܝܢ ܗܘܝܢ ܡܢ ܚܘܣܪܢܐ ܘܡܢ ܐܘܠܨܢܐ ܗܢܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

πολλῆς ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

πολλῆς ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης τότε σταθεὶς Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν·¶ Ἔδει μέν, ἄνδρες, πειθαρχήσαντάς μοι μὴ ἀνάγεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Κρήτης, κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
τε alsoNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Acts 27:21πολύςMuchMuchπολύςτέalsoalsoτέἀσιτίαtime withoutime without foἀσιτίαὑπάρχωthere beingthere beingὑπάρχωτότεat that timat that timeτότεἵστημιhaving stoohaving stood upἵστημι<the><the>ΠαῦλοςPaulPaulΠαῦλοςἐνininἐνμέσοςmidstmidstμέσοςαὐτόςof themof themαὐτόςειπενhe said;he said;ειπενδεῖIt was neceIt was necessarδεῖμένindeed,indeed,μένOOἀνήρmen,men,ἀνήρπειθαρχέωhaving beenhaving been obeπειθαρχέωμοιto meto meμοιμήnotnotμήἀνάγωto have setto have set saiἀνάγωἀπόfromfromἀπό<the><the>ΚρήτηCrete,Crete,Κρήτηκερδαίνωto have incto have incurreκερδαίνωτέthenthenτέ<the><the>ὕβριςdisasterdisasterὕβριςοὗτοςthisthisοὗτοςκαίandandκαί<the><the>ζημίαloss.loss.ζημίακαίCj. and, eCj. and, even, καίἄσιτοςAdj fastinAdj fastingἄσιτοςὑπόPrep. by, Prep. by, underὑπόμετάPrep. withPrep. with, aftμετάεἶπονv. I say, v. I say, speakεἶπονκέρδοςn.n. gain,n.n. gain, advaκέρδοςὑπέρPrep. in bPrep. in behalfὑπέρὅτεAdv whenAdv whenὅτεArticle thArticle theτίθημιv. I put, v. I put, placeτίθημιπαύωv. I causev. I cause to cπαύωεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦδέωv. I bindv. I bindδέωδέCj. but, oCj. but, on theδέἄνθρωποςn.m. a mann.m. a man, oneἄνθρωπος
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Acts 27:21

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
πολλῆςpolus Much G4183 Adjective · genitive · singular · feminine
413× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means much or many, and is used to describe things like large crowds, as in Mark 5:24, or a great amount of time, as in Matthew 25:19. It emphasizes the magnitude of something.
Tyndale gloss
much
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πολύς (polus) means much or many, covering a range of contexts from quantity to degree and value. It appears as an adjective and can also function as a noun or adverb. In the New Testament, it is used to describe large numbers of people or things, as seen in verses like Matthew 9:37 and John 6:10. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ,

[in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms;]

as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Ac 11:21; ὄχλος, Mk 5:24; θερισμός, Mt 9:37; χόρτος, Jo 6:10; χρόνος, Mt 25:19; γογγυσμός, Jo 7:12; πόνος, Col 4:13; δόξα, Mt 24:30; σιγή, Ac 21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mt 13:17; ὄχλοι, Mt 4:25; δαιμόνια, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts xviii. 10; ὄχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; 1. q. abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 24; xv. 5,8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58, ete.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but here L TWH om. Trbr. ὄχ.7; Lk. v. 15, ete.; δαιμόνια, Mk.i. 34; and in many otherexx.; with…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πολύς, “much,” plur. ‘‘many’’: P Petr I. 2905 (iii/B.c.) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ εἰ ὑγιαίνεις, ‘‘much thanks to the gods if you are well,” P Ryl II. 2435 (ii/A.D.) τοῦτο οὐ μόνον ἡμεῖν yevapevov ἀλλὰ Kal πολλοῖς, ‘this has happened not to us only but to many ” (Edd.), and 16. 238* (A.p. 262) διὰ πολλὰς χρείας, “for various needs’ (Edd.). The word is very conimon in epistolary greetings (πολλὰ χαίρειν : exx. from B.C. 118 to ili/iv A.D. in Exler Eprstolography p. 27 f.) and in rhetorical prefaces (Sirach proem.), and consequently, as Cadbury suggests (in Jackson and Lake Beginnings of Christianity Part I. Vol. ii. p. 492 f.), πολλοί must not be pressed to mean “ἡ Ac 243, 10, For the adverbial πολλά, which ‘‘ lies between πολύ and πολλάκις : it is ‘much’ with the idea of plurality and repetition introduced’’ (Hort ad Jas 32), cf. P Heid 622 (iv/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 127) πολλὰ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πολύς (polus) — much.

πολύς,

Attic dialect πολλή, πολ; genitive πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dative πολλῷ, ῇ, ; accusative πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—Ionic dialect πολλός [Refs 6th c.BC+], πολλή, πολλόν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; also in Trag., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: [Refs 5th c.BC+] uses the Ionic dialect forms, but codices have πολύν [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—both sets of forms are found in Epic dialect, also genitive singular πολέος [Refs 8th c.BC+], once contraction πολεῖς [Refs]; dative πολέσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative πολέας (trisyllable) [Refs 8th c.BC+] (frequently with variant{πολεῖς} [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in later Epic dialect πολέες is used as feminine, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect also have πουλύς (once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; these forms are found in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+] — Lyric poetry and Trag. (Lyric poetry) sometimes use Epic dialect forms, dative singular…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ

Adj

much, many, often

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πολύς polys 416x

great in magnitude or quantity, much, large, Mt. 13:5; Jn. 3:23; 15:8; pl. many, Mt. 3:7; in time, long, Mt. 25:19; Mk. 6:35; Jn. 5:6; οἱ πολλοί, the many, the mass, Rom. 5:15; 12:5; 1 Cor. 10:33; τὸ πολύ, much, 2 Cor. 8:15; πολύ, as an adv., much, greatly, Mk. 12:27; Lk. 7:47; of…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πολύς the ionic declension πολλός, ή, όν is retained by the attic in all cases, except the nom. and acc. masc. and neut. Hom. uses both ionic and attic forms. of Number, many, opp. to ὀλίγος, Hom., etc.;— with nouns of multitude, πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.; πολλὸν πλῆθος Hdt., etc.:—also of anything often repeated, πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος id. Hdt.; πολλὸς αἰνεόμενος id. Hdt.; τούτῳ πολλῷ χρήσεται τῷ λόγῳ often, Dem.

of Size, Degree, Force, much, mighty, great, Il., etc.; π. ὕπνος deep sleep, Od.; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il., etc.:—rarely of a single person, μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.; ἢν πολλῇ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, Eur.; πολλῷ ῥέοντι Dem.; from the wind, πολὺς ἔπνει was blowing strong, id. Dem.; often with a Partic., πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GSF — Adjective · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%many
many52% · 196×great17% · 66×much17% · 65×many things6% · 21×other renderings6% · 23×other renderings2% · 7×

378 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject36%adverbial29%object22%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 354 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅςεἰς
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἀπώλειαdestruction, ruiἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa
ὄχλοςa crowd
αὐτόςὁράωI see, look uponκαίand, even, also,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theὁράωI see, look uponμετά
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἀκολουθέωI accompany, attλαλέωI speak, say
πολύςMuch413×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheπρῶτοςfirst, beforeσυναναβαίνωI go up with
καίand, even, also, nam
ὡςas, like as, howθεραπεύωI care for, atteεὐθέωςimmediately, soo
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰμίI am, existἐκτέραςa wonder, porten
γάρfor
ἔρχομαιI come, goεἰμίI am, existπάσχωI am acted upon,
μᾶλλονmore, rather
Article theκράζωI cry aloud, shrσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπολύς · 413× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Mark Matthew John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation Hebrews 1 Timothy 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 335 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 38Pathyrites171 BC

τῶι προγεγραμμένωι ἱερῶι, ὁ ἐνκεκλημένος προσπηδήσας μοι ἐνώπιόν τινων ἔτυπτεν ἧι εἶχεν ῥάβδωι πληγαῖς πλειόσιν εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματός μου. ὅ τε περιεβλήμην, ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, περὶ ὦν

P.Grenf. 1 42Diospolis Parva170 BC–169 BC

νυνὶ παρεφεδρευόντων ἐν Διὸς πόλει τῆι μικρᾶι ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῶι ἐν Πτολεμαίδι ὑπαίθρωι. πολλὰς χρείας μισθοφόρων ἱππέων παρεσχημένων ἡμῶν ἤδη πολλάκις κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ κινδύνους μεγάλους

μέρους ἡμίσους ἀπὸ ἐδάφους ἀμπελῶνος ἀρουρῶν β ἡμίσους ἢ ὅσαν ἂν ἦι ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον καὶ τοῦ ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου αὐτοῦ παραδείσου καὶ φρεάτων καὶ ἐποικίων καὶ ληνῶνος καὶ γῆς

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
τεde also G5037 Conjunction
209× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A conjunction meaning and or both, used to connect words or ideas closely. Found in Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33, it shows a strong link between things.
Tyndale gloss
and/both
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τέ (te) is an enclitic copulative particle that functions similarly to the Latin '-que' and is used to denote a closer connection than the more general καί (kai). It appears primarily in the New Testament, especially in the book of Acts, and can mean 'and,' 'both,' or 'also.' Notably, it is used in verses like Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = et, ac, atque), not very freq. in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac.

τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (Bl., §77, 8): Mt 28:12, Jo 4:42, Ac 2:33, 37, 40 10:22 11:21, al.

Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Ac 26:16 Ro 14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Lk 12:45, Ac 1:1 15:9 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τέ, (as δέ comes fr. δή, μέν fr. μήν, so τέ fr. the adv. TH, prop. as; [al. ally it with καί, ef. Curtius $§ 27, 647; Vaniéek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat. § 195]), a copulative enclitie particle (on the use of which ef. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times; nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from the particle καί in that the latter is conjunctive, τέ adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Baéumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 145), καί introduces something new under the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas τέ marks it as…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τε (te) — and/both.

τε,

enclitic Particle, with two main uses (see. infr. A, B).

__A as a Conjunction,

__A.I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usually short in [Refs 8th c.BC+], longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ᾽ ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ᾽ ἀδικήσαντες κατ᾽ ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen.[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+], compare 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (which see); τε may be used three or more times…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τέ

te

a primary particle (enclitic) of connection or addition; both or also

(properly, as correlation of 2532):--also, and, both, even, then,

whether. Often used in composition, usually as the latter participle.

see GREEK for 2532

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τέ

Disj.prt.

and, both

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τε te 215x

enclitic, can function as a conj., serving either as a lightly-appending link, Acts 1:15; and, Acts 2:3; or as an inclusive prefix, Lk. 12:45; both, Lk. 24:20; Acts 26:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ol'-so: In the Greek kai, when it is equivalent to "also" or "even," is always placed before the word or phrase which it is intended to emphasize (e.g. Ac 12:3; 1 Joh 4:21). Mt 6:14 should therefore read, "Your heavenly Father will forgive you also"; Lu 6:13, "Whom also he named apostles"; Heb 8:6, "The mediator of a better covenant also"; and 1Th 4:14, `If we believe that Jesus died and rose again, so also (we believe that) those who are fallen asleep in Jesus, God will bring with Him.'

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
37%then
then37% · 84×both35% · 79×and14% · 32×also11% · 26×other renderings3% · 6×

227 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject20%adverbial19%object13%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀνευρίσκωI find by seekinδιαγογγύζωI murmur greatlyφίλος
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πιστεύωI believe, have κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπᾶςall, the whole,
λέγωI say, speak
καρδίαthe heart, innerφυλακήa watching, guarθεόςGod, a god
πολύςmuch, many, often
σφόδραexceedingly, greἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemαὐτός
ἐν
ἐγώμάρτυςa witnessποιέωI do, make
τέalso209×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Ἕλληνa Hellene, a Greγυνήa woman, wife, mArticle the
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaulχώραregion, land, fiπόλιςa city
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakπεριαστράπτωI flash around l
πρός
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
γάρfor
θῆλυςfemaleἐπιθυμίαdesire, eagernesζάωI live

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτέ · 209× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews Romans Luke 1 Corinthians John Matthew 2 Corinthians James Ephesians Jude Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ἀσιτίαςasitia time without food G776 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Fasting means going without food, often for spiritual reasons. In Acts 27:21, Paul and his shipmates fasted during a storm. It's about abstinence from food.
Amplified meaning
in a state of fasting
Tyndale gloss
fasting
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀσιτία (asitia) means fasting or abstinence from food. It is derived from the root ἄσιτος, indicating a lack of food. The term appears in Acts 27:21, where it refers to a state of fasting. Various lexicons note its usage in both voluntary and enforced contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* ἀσιτία, -ας, ἡ

(< ἄσιτος),

fasting, abstinence from food: Ac 27:21.†

SYN.: νηστεία (MM, ut infr.).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀσιτία, -ας, ἡ, (ἄσιτος 4. V.), abstinence from food (whether voluntary or enforced): πολλή long, Acts xxvil. 21. (Hat. 3, 52; Eur. Suppl. 1105; [Aristot. probl. 10,35; eth. Nic. 10 p. 1180°, 9]; Joseph. antt. 12, 7; al.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀσιτία. We can only add to the literary record the late P Ryl I. 108 (cf. #2), a hagiographical fragment of vi/A.D., containing a discourse by a saint condemned to death by starvation—&v’ ὃν τὴν ἀσιτίαν κατεκρίθην. See next article.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀσιτία (asitia) — fasting.

ἀσῑτ-ία,

Ionic dialect -ιη, ἡ, want of food, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. abstinence from food, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. want of appetite, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀσιτία

asitia

from 777; fasting (the state):--abstinence.

see GREEK for 777

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀσιτία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

abstinence, a fast

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀσιτία asitia 1x

abstinence from food, fasting, Acts 27:21*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀσιτία ἄσι_τος want of food, Hdt., Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

food:

I. VEGETABLE FOODS

1. Primitive Habits

2. Cereals

3. Leguminous Plants

4. Food of Trees

II. ANIMAL FOOD

LITERATURE

In a previous article (see BREAD) it has been shown that in the Bible "bread" usually stands for food in general and how this came to be so. In a complementary article on MEALS the methods of preparing and serving food will be dealt with. This article is devoted specifically to the foodstuffs of the Orient, more especially to articles of food in use among the Hebrews in Bible times. These are divisible into two main classes.

I. Vegetable Foods.

1. Primitive Habits:

Orientals in general are vegetarians, rather than flesh eaters. There is some reason to believe that primitive man was a vegetarian (see Ge 2:16; 3:2,6). It would seem, indeed, from a comparison of Ge 1:29 f…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Food

Originally the Creator granted the use of the vegetable world for food to man (Gen. 1:29), with the exception mentioned (2:17). The use of animal food was probably not unknown to the antediluvians. There is, however, a distinct law on the subject given to Noah after the Deluge (Gen. 9:2-5). Various articles of food used in the patriarchal age are mentioned in Gen. 18:6-8; 25:34; 27:3, 4; 43:11. Regarding the food of the Israelites in Egypt, see Ex. 16:3; Num. 11:5. In the wilderness their ordinary food was miraculously supplied in the manna. They had also quails (Ex.…

The diet of eastern nations has been in all ages light and simple. Vegetable food was more used than animal. The Hebrews used a great variety of articles, (John 21:5) to give a relish to bread. Milk and its preparations hold a conspicuous place in eastern diet, as affording substantial nourishment; generally int he form of the modern leben , i.e. sour milk. Authorized Version "butter;" (Genesis 18:8; Judges 5:25; 2 Samuel 17:29) Fruit was another source of subsistence: figs stood first in point of importance; they were generally dried and pressed into cakes. Grapes were generally eaten in a dried state as raisins. Of vegetables we have most frequent notice of lentils…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

In ancient the food of a people was more entirely the product of their own country than in our day. Palestine was favored with an abundance of animal food, grain, and vegetables. But throughout the East, vegetable food is more used than animal. Bread was the principal food. Grain of various kinds, beans, lentils, onions, grapes, together with olive oil, honey, and the milk of goats and cows were the ordinary fare. The wandering Arabs live much upon a coarse black bread. A very common dish in Syria is rice, with shreds of meat, vegetables, olive oil, etc., intermixed. A similar dish, made with beans, lentils, and various kinds of pulse, was in frequent use at an earlier age, Ge 25:29-34 2Ki 4:38-1.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%time without food
time without food100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceἀσιτία · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaThat the Worse Attacks the Better 34c. AD 40

οἱ μὲν γὰρ λεγόμενοι φιλάρετοι ἄδοξοι σχεδὸν ἅπαντες, εὐκαταφρόνητοι, ταπεινοί, τῶν ἀναγκαίων ἐνδεεῖς, ὑπηκόων μᾶλλον δὲ καὶ δούλων ἀτιμότεροι, ῥυπῶντες, ὠχροί, κατεσκελετευμένοι, λιμὸν ὑπ’ ἀσιτίας ἐμβλέποντες, νοσερώτατοι, μελετῶντες ἀποθνῄσκειν·

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ὑπαρχούσηςhuparchō there being G5225 Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
60× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be already in existence, like something or someone that was present from the start. It appears in Acts 19:40 and 27:12, describing things that were already happening. It can also mean to be ready or at hand.
Tyndale gloss
be already
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπάρχω (*hyparcho*) is built from the roots meaning 'under' and 'begin.' It encompasses meanings such as 'to begin,' 'to exist,' and 'to belong to.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including Acts 19:40 and 28:18, where it conveys existence or possession. Notably, the lexicons do not present significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπάρχω

[in LXX for הָיָה, יֵשׁ, לוּן, etc.; τ. ὑπάρχοντα for מִקְנֶה, רְכוּשׁ, etc. ;]

to begin, make a beginning (Hom., Hdt., al.).

to be in existence, be ready, be at hand (Hdt., Thuc., al.): Ac 19:40 27:12, 21; seq. ἐν, Ac 28:18.

to be, prop, expressing continuance of an antecedent state or condition (cf. Gifford, Incarnation, 11 ff.; MM, xxv): c. nom. pred., Lk 8:41 9:48, Ac 4:34 7:55 8:16 16:3 19:36 21:20, I Co 7:26 12:22, Ja 2:15, II Pe 3:11; ptcp. c. pred., Lk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπάρχω: impf. ὑπῆρχον; 1. prop. to begin below, to make a beginning; univ. to begin; (Hom., Aeschyl., Hat., sqq-). 2. to come forth, hence to be there, be ready, be at hand, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Pind., sqq.): univ. and simply, Acts xix. 40 [cf. B. § 151, 29 note]; xxvii. 12, 21; ἔν rem, to be found in one, Acts xxviii. 18; with a dat. of the pers. ὑπάρχει μοί τι, something is mine, I have something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 8 (where Lehm. παρόντα; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17; Job ii. 4, ete.) ; τὰ ὑπάρχοντά τινι, one’s substance, one’s property, Lk. viii. 3; xii. 15 Ltxt. T Tr WH; Acts iv. 32, (Gen. xxxi. 18; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 38,40); also τὰ ὑπ. τινος, Mt. xix. 21; xxiv.47; xxv. 14; Lk. xi. 21; xii. 15 RG Lmrg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. the dat.]; xiv. 33; xvi. 1; xix. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 3; Heb. x. 34, (often in Sept. for 1391, Wi39, 0°DD3; Sir. xli.1; Tob. i. 20, ete.; τὰ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπάρχω. The idea of falling back upon a ‘‘basis,’’ and hence of continuity with a previous state, which originally belonged this verb (cf. Hort ad Jas 215), seems gradually to have faded in later Greek, as the following exx. show—P Petr III. 64(4.)!* (iii/B.c.) τοῦτο (sc. τὸ ὀψώνιον) ὑπάρξει 7 τιμὴ τῶν εὑρεθέντων] παρὰ Τασύθει, ‘this will be made up by the price of the articles discovered in the possession of Tasuthis” (Edd.), P Hib I. γ218 (B.c. 241) τὴμ μὲν σφραγῖδα ὡμολόγουν ὑπάρχειν ἐν τῶι ἀδύτωι, ‘confessed that the seal was in the sanctuary”’ (Edd.), P Oxy IX. 11Sgl® (c. A.D. 117) περὶ γραφῆς τῶν τοῖς [᾿1Ι]ουδαίοις ὑπαρξάντων, ‘about ἃ list of property which belonged to the Jews”.(Ed.), 7. VI. 93317 (late ii/a.D.) πάντα αὐτῇ ὑπῆρκται, “everything was provided for her” (Edd.), 2d. 90518 (a.p. [2 ὑπείκω 170) (= Selections, p. 87) a marriage contract, where the giver of the bride has…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπάρχω (huparchō) — be already.

ὑπάρχω,

future

__A -ξω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ὑπῆρξα (see. below [Refs]:—passive, future ὑπαρχθήσομαι [Refs 3rd c.AD+]perfect ὕπηργμαι, Ionic dialect -αργμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—begin, take the initiative:—Constr.:

__A.1 absolutely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁ ὑπάρξας the beginner (in a quarrel), [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.2 with genitive, take the initiative in, begin, ἀδίκων ἔργων, ἀδικίης, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.3 with participle, take the initiative in doing, ἐμὲ ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑπάρχει εὖ (or κακῶς) ποιῶν τινα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἀμύνεσθαι οἷσπερ καὶ οἱ Λκεδαιμόνιοι ὑπῆρξαν retaliating by the means which the L. had used first, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπάρχω

huparcho

from 5259 and 756; to begin under (quietly), i.e. come into existence

(be present or at hand); expletively, to exist (as copula or

subordinate to an adjective, participle, adverb or preposition, or as

an auxiliary to a principal (verb):--after, behave, live.

see GREEK for 5259

see GREEK for 756

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπάρχω

v.

I am, exist, am in possession

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπάρχω hyparchō 60x

to begin; to come into existence; to exist; to be, subsist, Acts 19:40; 28:18; to be in possession, to belong, Acts 3:6; 4:37; goods, possessions, property, Mt. 19:21; Lk. 8:3; to be, Lk. 7:25; 8:41

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπάρχω fut. ξω aor1 ὑπῆρξα Pass., perf. ὕπηργμαι ionic -αργμαι to begin, make a beginning, absol., Od., Eur., etc.

c. gen. to make a beginning of, ἀδικίης Hdt.; πολλῶν κακῶν Eur., etc.

c. part to begin doing, ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες Hdt.; ὑπάρχει εὖ ποιῶν τινα Xen.

c. acc., ὑπ. εὐεργεσίας εἴς τινα or τινι to begin [doing] kindnesses to one, Dem., Aeschin.:—Pass. to be begun, τὰ ἔκ τινος ὑπαργμένα (ionic for ὑπηργ-) Hdt.:—impers., ὑπῆρκτο αὐτοῦ a beginning of it had been made, Thuc.

to begin to be, come into being, arise, spring up, Aesch., etc.

to be in existence, to be there, to be ready, Hdt., attic;—c. gen., ὑπάρχει τῶνδε there is store of these things, Aesch.:—oft. in part., ἡ ὑπάρχουσα οὐσία the existing property…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-GSF — Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-GSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
38%being
being38% · 23×possessions23% · 14×were5% · 3×be5% · 3×was3% · 2×existing3% · 2×other renderings13% · 8×other renderings10% · 6×

61 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb58%verb38%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 60 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐκσύ
σύ
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐνγάρfor
αὐτός
ὀφθαλμόςthe eyeμήτηρa motherπατήρfather, Father,
οὖνtherefore, then
προφήτηςa prophet, poetγένοςoffspring, famil
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πόλιςa cityσύ
ὑπάρχωthere being60×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
δίδωμιI offer, giveπίπτωI fall, fall undἐκμυκτηρίζωI deride, scoff
αὐτός
καθίστημιI set, establishλέγωI say, speakἀγρόςa field, the cou
Article the
θεόςGod, a godγυνήa woman, wife, mπατρικόςpaternal, ancest
ἐν
Article theβάσανοςtorture, tormentἐγώ
σύ
καίand, even, also,μετάἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπάρχω · 60× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 1 Corinthians 2 Peter Matthew 2 Corinthians Galatians Philippians Hebrews James Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 47 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 150c. AD 40

ἀκράτου γὰρ ἔτι τῆς λογικῆς φύσεως ὑπαρχούσης ἐν ψυχῇ καὶ μηδενὸς ἀρρωστήματος ἢ νοσήματος ἢ πάθους παρεισεληλυθότος, τὰς φαντασίας τῶν σωμάτων καὶ πραγμάτων ἀκραιφνεστάτας λαμβάνων εὐθυβόλους ἐποιεῖτο τὰς κλήσεις, εὖ μάλα στοχαζόμενος τῶν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.259c. AD 75–95

Λιμοῦ δὲ τὴν γῆν καταλαβόντος Ἴσακος, δόξαν αὐτῷ χωρεῖν εἰς Αἴγυπτον τῆς χώρας ἀγαθῆς ὑπαρχούσης, ἐπὶ Γεράρων ἀπῄει τοῦ θεοῦ κελεύσαντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.10c. AD 100

εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἦλθεν ἐν σαρκί, οὐδ̓ ἄν πως οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐσώθησαν βλέποντες αὐτόν, ὅτε τὸν μέλλοντα μὴ εἶναι ἥλιον, ἔργου τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχοντα, ἐμβλέποντες οὐκ ἰσχύουσιν εἰς τὰς ἀκτῖνας αὐτοῦ ἀντοφθαλμῆσαι:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἀδιαιρέτου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ πεδίωι Παθύρεως

P.Adl. 19Pathyris99 BC

ἡμέρας ἑκάστης· ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἔστω Ὥρωι ἔκ τε αὐτοῦ Γαλάτου καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ πάντων πράσσοντι καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
τότεtote at that time G5119 Adverb
159× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for then, used to describe a specific point in time, as seen in Matthew 2:17 and Galatians 4:8. It can refer to concurrent or consequent events, and is often used to introduce a new action or event.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τότε (i.e., *tote*) is a demonstrative adverb meaning 'then' or 'at that time.' It is used to refer to specific points in the past or future, often in relation to concurrent or consequent events. The New Testament frequently employs it, especially in the Gospel of Matthew, to indicate transitions in narrative or to specify timing.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τότε, demonstr. adv. of time, correlat. of ὅτε,

then, at that time;

of concurrent events: Mt 2:17 3:5 and freq., Ro 6:21; seq. ptcp., Mt 2:16, Ga 4:8; opp. to νῦν, Ga 4:29, He 12:26; ὁ τ. κόσμος, II Pe 3:6;

of consequent events, then, thereupon: Mt 2:7 3:5 4:1 and freq., Lk 11:26; τ. οὖν, Jo 11:14 19:1, 16 20:8; εὐθέως τ., Ac 17:14; ὅτε .…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τότε, demonstr. ady. of time, (fr. the neut. art. τό, and the enclit. τέ [q. v.]; answering to the relative ore [Kiihner $506, 2 ¢.]), fr. Hom. down, then; at that time; a. then i.e. at the time when the things under consideration were taking place, (of a concomitant event): Mt. ii. 17 (τότε ἐπληρώθη) ; iii. 9, 13; xii. 22, 38; xv. 1; xix. 13; xx. 20; xxvii.9, 16; Ro. vi. 21; foll. by a more precise specification of the time by means of an added participle, Mt. ii. 16; Gal. iv. 8; opp. to νῦν, Gal. iv. 29; Heb. xii. 26; 6 τότε κόσμος, the world that then was, 2 Pet. iii. 6. b. then i. e. when the thing under consideration had been said or done, thereupon; so in the historical writers (esp. Matthew), by way of transition from one thing mentioned to another which could not take place before it [W. 540 (503); B. § 151, 31 fin.]: Mt. iv. 1,5; xxvi. 14; xxvii. 38; Actsi.12; x. 48; xxi. 33…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τότε (tote) — then.

τότε,

Doric dialect τόκᾰ (which see) (both forms in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect τότᾰ [Refs 7th c.BC+] accusative to codices of [Refs 3rd c.BC+], compare ποτα, ὄτα):— adverb at that time, then, corresponding to Relat. ὅτε or ὁπότε (below [Refs]; mostly of some point in past time, opposed to νῦν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also of a future time, τότε κέν μιν.. πεπίθοιμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] (or of imagined circumstances, in that case [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes, then, next, πρῶτον μὲν.., εἶτα.., καὶ τ... [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—in Trag. and Attic dialect also in indefinite sense, formerly, καὶ νῦν θ᾽ ὁμοίως καὶ τότ᾽ ἐξεπίσταμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]just now, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. μὲν.., νῦν δὲ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]at one time or other, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τότε

tote

from (the neuter of) 3588 and 3753; the when, i.e. at the time that

(of the past or future, also in consecution):--that time, then.

see GREEK for 3753

see GREEK for 3588

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τότε

Adv

then

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τότε tote 160x

then, at that time, Mt. 2:17; 3:5; 11:20; then, Mt. 12:29; 13:26; 25:31; ἀπὸ τότε, from that time, Mt. 4:17; 16:21; ὁ τότε, which then was, 2 Pet. 3:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τότε at that time, then, Lat. tunc, Antec. to Relat. ὅτε or ὁπότε, opp. to νῦν, Il., Hom., etc.:—also in indef. sense, in those times, formerly, Soph., etc.; τότ᾽ ἢ τότε at one time or other, Aesch., Eur.

joined with other Particles, καὶ τότε δή Hom.; καὶ τότ᾽ ἔπειτα Il.; τότε δή ῥα Od., etc.; τότ᾽ ἤδη then at length, Hes.

with the Article, οἱ τότε the men of that time, Il., etc.; οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι Hdt.; τῇ τόθ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ Soph.; ἐν τῷ τότε (sc. χρόνῳ) Thuc.

εἰς τότε until then, Dem.; ἐκ τότε or ἐκτότε since then, Plut.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

tim: The basis of the Hebrew measurement of time was the day and the lunar month, as with the Semites generally. The division of the day into hours was late, probably not common until after the exile, although the sun-dial of Ahaz (2Ki 20:9; Isa 38:8) would scent to indicate some division of the day into periods of some sort, as we know the night was divided, The word used for "hour" is Aramaic she`a' (sha`ta'), and does not occur in the Old Testament until the Book of Daniel (4:33; 5:5), and even there it stands for an indefinite period for which "time" would answer as well.

1. The Day:

The term "day" (yom) was in use from the earliest times, as is indicated in the story of the Creation (Ge 1). It there doubtless denotes an indefinite period, but is marked off by "evening and…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Besides the ordinary uses of this word, the Bible sometimes employs it to denote a year, as in Da 4:16; or a prophetic year, consisting of three hundred and sixty natural year, a day being taken for a year. Thus in Da 7:25 12:7, the phrase "a time, times, and the dividing of a time" is supposed to mean three and a half prophetic years, or 1,260 natural years. This period is elsewhere paralleled by the expression, "forty-two months," each month including thirty years, Re 11:2-3 12:6,14 13:5.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Beginning of Ge 1:1,14

→ Epochs of

Before the flood Jos 24:2

→ The exodus Ex 19:1; 40:17; 1Ki 6:1

→ Daniel' s reckoning of time, and times, and half times Da 7:25; 12:7

→ Indicated by a sun-dial 2Ki 20:9-11; Isa 38:8

→ Division of, into watches Ex 14:24; 1Sa 11:11; Mt 14:25; Mr 6:48

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- The duration of the world

Job 22:16; Re 10:6

- The measure of the continuance of anything

Jud 18:31

- An appointed season

Ne 2:6; Ec 3:1,17

- COMPUTED BY

. Years

Ge 15:13; 2Sa 21:1; Da 9:2

. Months

Nu 10:10; 1Ch 27:1; Job 3:6

. Weeks

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
91%then
then91% · 148×at that time5% · 8×that time2% · 4×other renderings1% · 2×

162 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 159 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
σύνυμφίοςa bridegroomδοκόςa beam
ἀπό
καίand, even, also,ἸωάννηςJohn
δέbut, on the other ha
ἔχωI have, hold, poεὐθέωςimmediately, soo
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article theδοξάζωI glorify, honor
ἀσθενέωI am weak, sick
ὅτιthat, since, becγάρfor
τότεat that time159×
what comes after →
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaulἸησοῦςJesusἐν
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theεἰς
ἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
αὐτόςArticle theκαίand, even, also,
ἄρχωI begin
λέγωI say, speakArticle theὀνειδίζωI reproach, revi
προσέρχομαιI come near, consent
Article theαὐτόςἐπιβάλλωI throw upon, la

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτότε · 159× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John 1 Corinthians Mark Galatians Hebrews 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 2 Peter 2 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 102 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 88c. AD 40

οἱ μὲν γὰρ ὑστερίζοντες τῶν ὑποζυγίων καὶ κατόπιν αὐτῶν ἐξεταζόμενοι ᾗ ἂν ἐθέλωσιν αὐτὰ ἄγουσι τῶν ἡνιῶν ἐνειλημμένοι καὶ τοτὲ μὲν ἐφιέντες πρὸς ὀξὺν δρόμον τοτὲ δ’ ἀναχαιτίζοντες, εἰ φορᾷ τοῦ δέοντος πλείονι θέοι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.4c. AD 100

τότε ῥαγήσεται πρώϊμον τὸ φῶς σου, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτιά σου ταχέως ἀνατελεῖ, καὶ προπορεύσεται ἔμπροσθέν σου ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡ δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ περιστελεῖ σε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

καὶ ἐν ἄλληι σφραγῖδι ἄλλων ἀρουρῶν ι, πασῶν περὶ Παθῦριν, ἐπέδωκαν ὑπόμνημα … τῷ τοτε στρατηγῶι κατά τε ἡμῶν καὶ τοῦ τῆς Σενενούπιος … Θράσωνος. τούτων ἀδίκως ἐνποιούμενοι και

P.Amh. 2 77Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 139

ὅπερ φανερὸν τοῦτο ἐγένετο τοῖς τε τῆς νομαρχίας ἐπιτηρηταῖς καὶ τῷ ἐπὶ τῶν τόπων τότε ὄντι βενεφικιαρίωι

ÉdP 5 (1939), p. 94Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 298

σιτικὰς δημοσίας ἀρούρας ταῖς μὴ δυναμέναις ὑπαντᾶν τοῖς φόροις τῶν ἀρουρῶν. προσήλθαμεν δὲ καὶ τότε τῷ γενομένῳ πρωτοστάτῃ τῆς κώμης Σερήνῳ τῷ καὶ Ἁρποκρᾷ καὶ ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν ἅπαντα τὰ

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
σταθεὶςhistēmi having stood up G2476 Verb · aorist · passive · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
153× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To stand means to be in an upright position, either physically or figuratively, as seen in Mark 7:9 and Acts 1:23. It can also mean to establish or appoint someone to a position, like in Acts 1:23 and Hebrews 10:9.
Tyndale gloss
to stand
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἵστημι (*histēmi*) means to make to stand or to set up, and can also refer to standing or being placed. It is used in various contexts, including appointing, establishing, and standing firm. The New Testament employs this term in verses like Mark 7:9 and Acts 1:23. There is some variation in its forms, with less frequent alternatives like ἱστάω and ἱστάνω noted in the lexicons.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἵστημι, and in late writers, also ἱστάνω (Veitch, s.v.; Bl., § 23, 2; M, Pr., 55),

[in LXX chiefly for עמד, קוּם, also for נצב ni., hi., יצב hith., etc.].

Trans, in pres., impf., fut. and 1 aor. act. and in the tenses of the pass.

to make to stand, to place, set, set up, establish, appoint: c. acc. pers., Mk 7:9, Ac 1:23 6:13 17:31, He 10:9; id. seq. ἐπί, c. acc. loc., Mt 4:5, Lk 4:9; ἐν μέσῳ, Mt 18:2, Mk 9:36, Jo 8:[3]; ἐνώπιον, Ac 6:6; παρ’…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἵστημι, more rarely ἱστάω ([({ν. Hdt. down; cf. Veitch s. v.)] ἱστῶμεν, Ro. iii. 31 RG) and ἱστάνω ([(late; cf. Veitch s. v.)] ἱστάνομεν, Ro. iii. 31 LT Tr WH), [ef. B. 44 (38) sq.; W. § 14, 1f.; 87 (83); WH. App. p. 168; Veitch p. 337 sq. |; fut. στήσω; 1 aor. ἔστησα; 2 aor. ἔστην; impv. στῆθι, inf. στῆναι, ptep. στάς ; pf. ἔστηκα [with pres. force; W. 274 (257)], inf. ἑστάναι [15 }2 5 νες G Tr -avae in Acts xii. 14] (nowhere ἑστηκέναι), ptep. mase. ἑστηκώς with neut. ἑστηκός, and in the shorter form ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα (Jn. viii. 9), with neut. ἑστώς and (LT Tr WH in Mt. xxiv. 15 [here R

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἵστημι (histēmi) — to stand.

ἵστημι

(compare ἱστάω, ἱστάνω),

I. causal, make to stand, imperative ἵστη [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect ἵστην, Epic dialect ἵστασκε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἵσταν [Refs 5th c.BC+]future στήσω, Doric dialect στᾱσῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔστησα, Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἔστᾰσαν for ἔστησαν uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 middle ἐστησάμην (never intransitive)[Refs 4th c.BC+]: perfect ἕστᾰκα [LXX+5th c.BC+]; also ἕστηκα (see. below) in transitive sense, (δι-) [LXX+4th c.BC+] [same place]; ἑστακεῖα transitive in [Refs]

II. intransitive, stand,

II.1. active, aorist 2 ἔστην, Epic dialect στάσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστησαν, more frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative στῆθι, Doric dialect στᾶθι [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἵστημι

histemi

a prolonged form of a primary stao stah'-o (of the same meaning, and

used for it in certain tenses); to stand (transitively or

intransitively), used in various applications (literally or

figuratively):--abide, appoint, bring, continue, covenant, establish,

hold up, lay, present, set (up), stanch, stand (by, forth, still, up).

Compare 5087.

see GREEK for 5087

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἵστημι

v.

I cause to stand, stand

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἵστημι histēmi 154x

pluperfect, ἑστάμην, also formed as στήκω   10x, trans. to make to stand, set, place, Mt. 4:5; to set forth, appoint, Acts 1:23; to fix, appoint, Acts 17:31; to establish, confirm, Rom. 10:3; Heb. 10:9; to set down, impute, Acts 7:60; to weigh out, pay, Mt. 26:15; intrans. to stand, Mt. 12:46; to stand fast, be firm, be permanent, endure, Mt. 12:25; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἵστημι for σίστημι, redupl. from ΣΤΑ Causal Tenses, to make to stand, Lat. sisto,

intr. to stand, Lat. sto,

Causal, to make to stand, set, Hom., etc.:— to set men in array, post them, Il., Xen.

to make to stand, stop, stay, check, Hom., etc.; στῆσαι τὴν φάλαγγα to halt it, Xen.; στ. τὰ ὄμματα to fix them, of a dying man, Plat.; ἵ. τὸ πρόσωπον, Lat. componere vultum, Xen.

to set up, ἱστ. ἱστόν to set up the loom, or to raise the mast, Hom.; to raise buildings, statues, trophies, etc., Hdt., attic; ἱστάναι τινὰ χαλκοῦν to set him up in brass, raise a brasen statue to him, Dem.

to raise, rouse, stir up, Hom., etc.; φυλόπιδα στήσειν to stir up strife, Od.; in aor1 mid., στήσασθαι μάχην id. Od.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-APP-NSM — Verb · aorist · passive · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-APP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
14%already standing
already standing14% · 21×having stood9% · 14×standing8% · 13×had stood6% · 9×stood5% · 7×have stood4% · 6×stand4% · 6×he stood3% · 5×other renderings48% · 74×

155 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 54 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb90%adverbial7%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 153 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
πόλιςa cityἹεροσόλυμαPropἐγείρωI wake, arouse,
αὐτός
μετάἀδελφόςa brotherλαλέωI speak, say
Article the
ὄχλοςa crowdπροσέρχομαιI come near, conὧδεhere
ὅς
ἀνήρa male human beiἐπίπερί
μακρόθενfrom a distance
ἀπότελώνηςa collector of t
ἵστημιhaving stood up153×
what comes after →
Article the
βασιλείαkingship, sovereἸησοῦςJesusμένDisj
ἐπί
Article theτόποςa place
καίand, even, also, nam
λέγωI say, speakἀκούωI hear, listenθερμαίνωI warm
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theΖακχαῖοςZacchaeusπᾶςall, the whole,
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἵστημι · 153× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew Revelation John Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians Hebrews James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 345 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.83c. AD 40

πολλαὶ δὲ καρτερίας καὶ σωφροσύνης ἐρασθεῖσαι ψυχαὶ καὶ ἐρημωθεῖσαι παθῶν ὅμως κράτος ὑπέμειναν θεοῦ καὶ τροπὴν τὴν πρὸς τὸ χεῖρον ἐδέξαντο, διασυνιστάντος αὑτόν τε καὶ τὴν γένεσιν τοῦ δεσπότου, ἑαυτὸν μέν, ὅτι ἀκλινὴς ἕστηκεν ἀεί, τὴν δὲ γένεσιν,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.185c. AD 75–95

εἶτα πρὶν στῆναι τὸν βωμὸν οἰωνῶν ἐφιπταμένων ἐπιθυμίᾳ τοῦ αἵματος φωνὴ θεία παρῆν ἀποσημαίνουσα πονηροὺς αὐτοῦ τοῖς ἐγγόνοις γείτονας ἐπὶ ἔτη τετρακόσια γενησομένους κατὰ τὴν Αἴγυπτον·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.10c. AD 100

λαμβάνει δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν τριῶν δογμάτων γνῶσιν Δαυείδ καὶ λέγει: Μακάριος ἀνήρ, ὃς οὐκ ἐπορεύθη ἐν βουλῇ ἀσεβῶν, καθὼς καὶ οἱ ἰχθύες πορεύονται ἐν σκότει εἰς τὰ βάθη: καὶ ἐν ὁδῷ ἁμαρτωλῶν οὐκ ἔστη, καθὼς οἱ δοκοῦντες φοβεῖσθαι τὸν κύριον ἁμαρτάνουσιν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC
P. Gen. 1 7Arsinoites (?)AD 86

ἀρχιπροφήτης ἀπέστειλά σοι. αἱ μὲν οὖν προσήκουσαι αὐτῷ τάξεις φυλαχθήτωσαν ὥσπερ οἱ πρὸ ἐμοῦ ἔστησαν κατὰ τὸ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἔθος. πρὸς δὲ τοὺς κακῶς ὑπεσχημένους ἀναλημφθήτωσαν αἱ δοθεῖσαι ὑπʼ

P.Fam.Tebt. 24 [1888]ArsinoitesAD 124

κράτιστον ἡγεμόνα τὸν στρατηγὸν … … τα εἶναι ἄχρηστα καὶ δηλῶσαι το … γὰρ σταθήσεται … … γεναμένῳ διαλογισμῷ τὸν στρατηγήσαντα Πτο … … … κέναι καὶ δεδηλωκέναι τίνα

P.Mil.Vogl. 6 264Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 127

σέ, ἐγώ τε καταδεής εἰμι καθὼς ἐκ τῆς ὄψεως ὁρᾷς, οὐ δύναμαι … … στηναι τηλικαύτης τῆς … … … … … ακαιαφ … … … … επις

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ΠαῦλοςPaulos Paul G3972 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
158× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Paul, originally named Saul, was a Roman apostle who wrote many letters in the New Testament, including Romans and 1 Corinthians. He is a key figure in the early Christian church.
Amplified meaning
the apostle, a servant of Christ
Tyndale gloss
Paul
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Παῦλος (transliterated as Paulos) refers to Paul, a prominent figure in the New Testament, specifically the Apostle Paul. It is of Latin origin, meaning 'little,' and is used frequently in the Acts of the Apostles and the Epistles. The name also appears in reference to Sergius Paulus, a Roman proconsul mentioned in Acts 13:7.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

Sergius Paulus: Ac 13:7.

the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Ac 13:9, and freq. throughout Ac., Ro 1:1, I Co 1:1, al., II Pe 3:15.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Παῦλος. The designation Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος οἱ Ac 13° is fully discussed by Deissmann 4S, p. 313 ff., where it is shown that the Apostle was already in possession of the double name at the time referred to: cf. Ramsay Paw/, p. 81 ff. Elsewhere (Recent Discovery, p. 356) Ramsay suggests that Paul’s complete Roman name may have been “Ὁ. Julius Paullus,” in view of the frequent conjunction of the names Julius Paullus in Lycaonia. In the important letter on the Meletian Schism, P Lond 19145® (A.D. 3352), greetings are conveyed to Παῦλον τὸν ἀναγνώστην : the editor refers to a priest of the same name (ἀπὸ Tnévas) in 2. 191744 (c. A.D. 330-340), and to ὃ μακάριος Παῦλος in 74. 1919% (same date). The name is not uncommon in the inscrr., see e.g. Perg 374 A® (time of Augustus), where ’A. Καστρίκιος Παῦλος is included among the choristers of θεὸς Σεβαστὸς kal θεὰ Ρώμη in Pergamum: cf. Thieme…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Παῦλος (Paulos) — Paul.

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7.

2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15.

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Παῦλος (Paulos) — Paulus.

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7.

2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1,

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

∏αῦλος

Paulos

of Latin origin; (little; but remotely from a derivative of 3973,

meaning the same); Paulus, the name of a Roman and of an

apostle:--Paul, Paulus.

see GREEK for 3973

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Παῦλος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Paul

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Παῦλος Paulos 158x

Paulus, Paul, pr. name. (1) Paul, the Apostle, Acts 13:9, et al. freq. (2) Sergius Paulus, the deputy or proconsul of Cyprus, Acts 13:7

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Paul

=Saul (q.v.) was born about the same time as our Lord. His circumcision-name was Saul, and probably the name Paul was also given to him in infancy “for use in the Gentile world,” as “Saul” would be his Hebrew home-name. He was a native of Tarsus, the capital of Cilicia, a Roman province in the south-east of Asia Minor. That city stood on the banks of the river Cydnus, which was navigable thus far; hence it became a centre of extensive commercial traffic with many countries along the shores of the Mediterranean, as well as with the countries of central Asia Minor. It thus became a city distinguished for the wealth of its inhabitants.

Tarsus was also the seat of a famous university, higher in reputation even than the universities of Athens and Alexandria, the only others that then existed. Here Saul was born, and here he spent his youth, doubtless enjoying the best education…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(small, little). Nearly all the original materials for the life St. Paul are contained in the Acts of the Apostles and in the Pauline epistles. Paul was born in Tarsus, a city of Cilicia. (It is not improbable that he was born between A.D. 0 and A.D. 5.) Up to the time of his going forth as an avowed preacher of Christ to the Gentiles, the apostle was known by the name of Saul. This was the Jewish name which he received from his Jewish parents. But though a Hebrew of the Hebrews, he was born in a Gentile city. Of his parents we know nothing, except that his father was of the tribe of Benjamin, (Philemon 3:5) and a Pharisee, (Acts 23:6) that Paul had acquired by some means the Roman franchise ("I was free born,") (Acts 22:23)…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The distinguished "apostle of the Gentiles;" also called SAUL, a Hebrew name. He is first called Paul in Ac 13:12; and as some think, assumed this Roman name according to a common custom of Jews in foreign lands, or in honor of Sergius Paulus, Ac 13:7, his friend and an early convert. Both names however may have belonged to him in childhood. He was born at Tarsus in Cilicia, and inherited from his father the privileges of a Roman citizen. His parents belonged to the tribe of Benjamin, and brought up their son as "a Hebrew of the Hebrews," Php 3:5. Tarsus was highly distinguished for learning and culture, and the opportunities for improvement it afforded were no doubt diligently improved by Paul. At a suitable age he was sent to…

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

small; little

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
97%paul
paul97% · 159×other renderings3% · 5×

164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject60%object18%adverbial15%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 158 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δέbut, on the otheτότεthenτέDisj
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theἀνίστημιI raise up, set διαπονέομαιI am greatly tro
ἐγώ
δέbut, on the otheὁράωI see, look uponχάρινon account of
καίand, even, also, nam
ΒαρναβᾶςBarnabasArticle the
χείρa hand
ἐμόςArticle the
ΠαῦλοςPaul158×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theΒαρναβᾶςBarnabasΣιλᾶςSilas
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, μαθητήςa learner, disciσυνέδριονa council, the S
λέγωI say, speak
διάArticle theθέλωI will, wish, de
ἀπόστολοςan apostle, a messen
Χριστόςanointed, the MeοὐNeg
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,ἀξιόωI account or treἐπιλέγωI call, choose f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΠαῦλος · 158× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Colossians Philemon 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians Ephesians Galatians 1 Timothy 2 Peter 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 19.102c. AD 75–95

προεξῄεσαν δὲ Κλαύδιος μὲν ὁ πάτρως αὐτοῦ καὶ Μᾶρκος Βινίκιος ὁ τῆς ἀδελφῆς ἀνὴρ ἔτι δὲ Οὐαλέριος Ἀσιατικός, οὓς οὐδὲ βουλομένοις διακλεῖσαι δύναμις ἦν αἰδοῖ τῆς ἀξιώσεως, εἵπετο δʼ αὐτὸς σὺν Παύλῳ Ἀρουντίῳ.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 5.5c. AD 96

διὰ ζῆλον καὶ ἔριν Παῦλος ὑπομονῆς βραβεῖον ὑπέδειξεν,

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.12.2c. AD 110

πάροδός ἐστε τῶν εἰς θεὸν ἀναιρουμένων, Παύλου συμμύσται τοῦ ἡγιασμένου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD
ÉdP 7 (1948), p. 40-Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 311

σαργάνη α Ἀεῖς Σαλιοῦτος σαργάνη α Ἰσίδωρος Ἡρᾶ σαργάνη α Ἥρων Ἀπώνεως σαργάνη α Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου σαργάνη α Πελῆνις σαργάναι β Ἀχιλλᾶς Ἀντωνίνου σαργάνη α Ἰσιδώρα Πτολεμαίου σαργάνη α

P.Cair. Isid. 20Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 314

Ἀτισίου Διόσκορος Κάστορος Παμοῦν Ἥρωνος Νεᾶς μητρὸς Τύχης κτηνῶν ὁμοίως Ἀτῖσις Ἀβοίκεως Δοῦλος Λεονίδου Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου Σαβῖνος Ἀχιλλᾶ Οὐενᾶφρις Ἀιώνεως Σώτας Ἀπολλωνίου Παῆσις Σεταβοῦ Οὐενᾶφρις Παησίου Κοπρῆς Παλήμωνος Μιὼς

P.Cair. Isid. 28Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 312–AD 323

δραχμαὶ Γ Ἡρᾶς Βακχείου ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Ἁτρῆς εἰρηνάρχης ἀρτάβαι β τάλαντα β Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Κάλλων Οὐενάφρεως ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Παπέεις Ἀιώνεως ἀρτάβη

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ἐνen in G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
μέσῳmesos midst G3319 Adjective · dative · singular · neuter
58× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Middle or midst, referring to a central position, is used in Luke 23:45 and John 19:18 to describe a location.
Tyndale gloss
midst
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μέσος is an adjective meaning 'middle' or 'in the midst.' It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in references to time (e.g., 'at midnight' in Mt 25:6) and location (e.g., 'in the midst of' in Lk 22:55). The word can also function as a neuter noun, often used in phrases indicating position or relationship, such as 'between' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μέσος, -η, -ον,

[in LXX chiefly for תָּוֶךְ;]

middle, in the middle or midst;

prop., as an adj.: Lk 23:45, Jo 19:18, Ac 1:18; c. gen. pl., Lk 22:55, Jo 1:26; gen. temp. (Bl., § 36, 13), μέσης νυκτός, Mt 25:6; μ. ἡμέρας, Ac 26:13.

In adverbial phrases, neut., μέσον, τὸ μ., as subst.: ἀνὰ μέσον, c. gen., between (cl.; in LXX: Ge 1:4, al.), elliptically (but v. M, Pr., 99), I Co 6:5; = ἐν μ., among, in the midst of (Bl., § 39, 2; 40, 8; cf. in LXX:

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μέσος, -n, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], middle, (Lat. medius, “a, -umM) ; 1. as an adjective: μέσης νυκτός, at midnight, Mt. xxv. 6; μέσης ἡμέρας, Acts xxvi. 13 (ace. to Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 53, 54, 465, the better writ. said péGov ἡμέρας, μεσοῦσα ἡμέρα, μεσημβρία); w. gen.: [exdθητο ὁ Πέτρος μέσος αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii. 55 (RG Lév μέσῳ)]; μέσος ὑμῶν ἔστηκε [8]. στήκει], stands in the midst of you, Jn. i. 26, (Plat. de rep. 1 p. 380 b.;_ polit. p. 303 4.); ἐσχίσθη μέσον, (the veil) was rent in the midst, Lk. xxiii. 45 [W. 131 (124) note]; ἐλάκησε μέσος, Acts i. 18; (ἐσταύρωσαν) μέσον τὸν Ἰησοῦν, Jn. xix. 18. 2. the neut. τὸ μέσον or (without the art. in adverb. phrases, as διὰ μέσου, ἐν μέσῳ, cf. W. 123 (117); [ef. B. § 125, 67) μέσον is used as a substantive; Sept. for 7) (constr. state 71M), and 37); the midst: ἀνὰ μέσον (see ἀνά, 1 {and added note below]); διὰ μέσου (τινός), through the midst (Am.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μέσος is common as an adj. in personal descriptions, e.g. P Ryl II. 128% (c. a.p. 30) ᾿Ατρῆ(ς) (ἐτῶν) Xe οὐ(λὴ) μετώπί(ῳ) μέσῳ, “᾿Ηδίτεβ, aged 35, with a scar on the middle of the forehead,”’ 25. 1543 (A.D. 66) Χαι]ρήμων . . - οὐλήι ῥινὶ μίῆσηι, ‘‘Chaeremon with a scar on the middle of the | and nose,” similarly of height, as in P Oxy I. 7318 (A.D. 94) / [ET OTOLXOV

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέσος (mesos) — midst.

μέσος, η, ον,

also [Refs 4th c.AD+]; Epic dialect μέσσος (also Aeolic dialect, [Refs 7th c.BC+], Boeotian dialect, Cretan dialect μέττος, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] ii b 2 [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, in the middle,

I. of Space, especially with Nouns, of the middle point or part, μ. σάκος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐρανός zenith, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μ. ἀπήνης from mid chariot, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν αἰθέρι μ. in mid-air, [Refs]; μ. μετώπῳ in the middle of the forehead, [Refs 1st c.AD+]: in Prose frequently preceding the Article, κατὰ μέσον τὸν σταθμόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ μ. τῆς νήσου, κατὰ μ. τὴν νῆσον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ μέσου τοῦ τμάματος at the middle point of the segment, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: sometimes following the Noun, ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ μέσῃ [Refs 4th c.BC+]: less frequently midmost, central, of three or more objects, μ. ὁδός [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ὁ μ.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μέσος

mesos

from 3326; middle (as an adjective or (neuter) noun):--among, X before

them, between, + forth, mid(-day, -night), midst, way.

see GREEK for 3326

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μέσος, η, ον

Adj

middle, in the middle

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μέσος mesos 58x

mid, middle, Mt. 25:6; Acts 26:13; ἀνὰ μέσον, in the midst; from the Hebrew, in, among, Mt. 13:25; between, 1 Cor. 6:5; διὰ μέσου, through the midst of, Lk. 4:30; εἰς τὸ μέσον, into, or in the midst, Mk. 3:3; Lk. 6:8; ἐκ μέσου, from the midst, out of the way, Col. 2:14; 2 Thess. 2:7; from the Hebrew, from, from among, Mt. 13:49; ἐν τῷ…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μέσος middle, in the middle, Lat. medius, Hom., etc.; μέσον σάκος the middle or centre of the shield, Il.; ἐν αἰθέρι μέσῳ in mid air, Soph.; with the Art. following, διὰ μέσης τῆς πόλεως, ἐν μ. τῇ χώρᾳ Xen.

with a Verb, ἔχεται μέσος by the middle, by the waist, proverb. from the wrestling-ring, Ar.

μ. δικαστής ῀ μεσίτης, a judge between two, an umpire, Thuc.

ὁ μέσος (sc. δάκτυλος) Plat.

of Time, μέσον ἦμαρ mid- day, Hom.; μέσαι νύκτες Hdt.; also, μέσον τῆς ἡμέρας id. Hdt.

middling, moderate, μέσος ἀνήρ a man of middle rank, id. Hdt.; μ. πολίτης Thuc.; also οἱ διὰ μέσου the moderate or neutral party, id. Thuc.

middling, i. e. middling good, Plat.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-DSN — Adjective · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DSN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
83%midst
midst83% · 50×middle7% · 4×between3% · 2×other renderings7% · 4×

60 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial90%predicate7%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 58 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
αὐτόςκαίand, even, also,ΠαῦλοςPaul
Article the
εἰςἐνἐκ
ἐκ
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oπονηρόςevil, bad, wickeαὐτός
ἀνά
ζιζάνιονspurious wheat, ΓαλιλαίαGalileeδιακρίνωI distinguish, d
διά
διέρχομαιI pass through,
μέσοςmidst58×
what comes after →
Article the
θρόνοςa throne, seatἀδελφόςa brotherσῖτοςwheat, grain
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,πορεύομαιI travel, journeἐκχωρέωI go out, depart
καίand, even, also, nam
λέγωI say, speakἀρέσκωI please, serveἀνίστημιI raise up, set
σύ
εἰμίI am, existστήκωI stand fast, peκαθώςjust as, as
λύκοςa wolf, jackal
γίνομαιI come into bein

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμέσος · 58× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Revelation Matthew John Mark 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians Colossians Hebrews
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 390 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 63c. AD 40

χαίρει γὰρ τὰ μέν τινα τεναγώδει καὶ οὐ πάνυ βαθείᾳ θαλάττῃ, τὰ δ’ ὑποδρόμοις καὶ λιμέσι μήτ’ ἐπὶ γῆν ἀνέρπειν μήτε πόρρω γῆς ἐπινήχεσθαι δυνάμενα, τὰ δὲ κατὰ μέσον καὶ βαθὺ πέλαγος διαιτώμενα τὰς προκεχυμένας ἄκρας ἢ νήσους ἢ πέτρας ἐκτρέπεται·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.223c. AD 75–95

σωζομένους δʼ ἐκ παραδόξου καὶ σχεδὸν ἐκ μέσου τῶν κακῶν εὑρισκομένους τὴν εὐπραγίαν τοὺς κινδυνεύοντας τῇ τοῦ θεοῦ γνώμῃ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.11c. AD 100

τί δέ, ὅτι τὸ ἔριον μέσον τῶν ἀκανθῶν τιθέασιν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Νεχούτης Σχώτου τοῦ Φιμήνιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ὠνή. ἀπέδοτο Πανοβχοῦνις Παοῦτος Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς γῆς ἠπείρου

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

ἐτῶν δέκα δύο μετὰ προσπωλουμένης τῆς Ὥρου συγγενοῦς Ἀρσινόης τῆς Βελλέους ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσης μελιχρόου στρογγυλοπροσώπου εὐθύρινος οὐλὴ μετώπῳ ἐκ δεξιῶν μετὰ κυρίου Πτολεμαίου τοῦ Ψενμεγχείους ὡς ἐτῶν

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
αὐτῶνautos of them G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GPM — Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof them5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
εἶπεν·¶legō he said; G2036 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
1,988× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἶπον (eipon) — to say.

εἶπον

(present ἔπω is used by [Refs 2nd c.BC+]present in use is φημί, λέγω, ἀγορεύω (see. infr. IV), the future ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, the perfect εἴρηκα), Epic dialect and Lyric poetry ἔειπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive εἴπω (Epic dialect εἴπωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative εἴποιμ; infinitive εἰπεῖν, Epic dialect -έμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs]; participle εἰπών: also aorist 1 εἶπα (ἔειπα [Refs 5th c.BC+] as I said, [Refs 1st c.BC+] mostly in Ionic dialect Prose, also [Refs 4th c.BC+], and the 2nd pers. indicative and imperative of this form are preferred in Attic dialect, 2nd pers. singular indicative εἶπας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative εἶπον (on the accent see[Refs 5th c.BC+], -ατον, -ατ; 3rd.pers. plural εἶπαν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; participle εἴπας [Refs 4th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect εἴπαις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in compounds middle ἀπείπασθαι (which see), διείπασθαι (which see)…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

epo

a primary verb (used only in the definite past tense, the others being

borrowed from 2046, 4483, and 5346); to speak or say (by word or

writing):--answer, bid, bring word, call, command, grant, say (on),

speak, tell. Compare 3004.

see GREEK for 2046

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 3004

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔπω εἶπον prob. made up by Nicander as present of εἶπον. to say, Nicander.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
39%said
said39% · 372×he said27% · 260×they said7% · 67×having said4% · 40×other renderings15% · 143×other renderings8% · 73×

955 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 73 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
Ἔδειdei It was necessary [for you] G1163 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
102× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This means it is necessary or must be done, like when Jesus said it was necessary for him to go to Jerusalem in Matthew 16:21.
Tyndale gloss
be necessary
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δεῖ is an impersonal verb meaning 'it is necessary' or 'one must,' derived from δέω. It covers a range of uses, often indicating obligation or necessity, and appears in various constructions, such as with infinitives or accusatives. In the New Testament, it is used in verses like Matthew 26:54 and Acts 5:29. The lexicons note that it differs from similar terms like ὀφείλει, which expresses moral obligation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δεῖ impersonal (δέω),

[in LXX chiefly for infin. with לְ ;]

one must, it is necessary: c. inf., Mt 26:54, Mk 13:7, Ac 5:29, al.; c. acc. et inf., Mt 16:21, Mk 8:31, Jo 3:7, Ac 25:10, al.; with ellipse of acc., Mt 23:23; of acc., and inf., Mk 13:14, Ro 1:27 8:26; οὐ (μὴ) δεῖ (non licet), ought not, must not: Ac 25:24, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δεῖ (dei) — be necessary.

δεῖ:

subjunctive δέη, sometimes contraction δῆ (in codices of Comedy texts, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁπόσου κα δῆ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive δεῖ; participle δέον (see. infr. IV): imperfect ἔδει, Ionic dialect ἔδεε: future δεήσει [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist I ἐδέησε [Refs 5th c.BC+] —Impers. from δέω (A), there is need (the sense of moral obligation, properly belonging to χρή, is later, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. c.accusative person et infinitive, it is needful for one to do, one must, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] why need the Argives fight? [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with nominative of the pronoun, ἡγούμην.. δεῖν.. μεγαλοψυχότερος φαίνεσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with dative person, there is need of.. for.., θεοῖσι προσβαλεῖν χθονὶ ἄλλην δεήσει γαῖαν [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δεῖ

dei

3d person singular active present of 1210; also deon deh-on'; neuter

active participle of the same; both used impersonally; it is (was,

etc.) necessary (as binding):--behoved, be meet, must (needs), (be)

need(-ful), ought, should.

see GREEK for 1210

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δεῖ

v.

it is necessary, inevitable

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δεῖ dei 101x

it is binding, it is necessary, it is proper; it is inevitable, Acts 21:22

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δεῖ from δέω1, to bind c. acc. pers. et inf., δεῖ τινὰ ποιῆσαι it is binding on one to do a thing, one must, one ought, Lat. oportet, Hom., etc.:—rarely, δεῖ σε ὅπως δείξεις ῀ δεῖ σε δεῖξαι, Soph.: —rarely also c. dat. pers. et inf., there is need for one to do, δεῖ τινὶ ποιήσαι Eur., Xen.

c. acc. rei et inf., δεῖ τι γενέσθαι Thuc., etc.:—for the phrase οἴομαι δεῖν, v. οἴομαι:— when used absol., an inf. may be supplied, μὴ πεῖθ᾽ ἃ μὴ δεῖ (sc. πείθειν) Soph., etc.

(from δέω2, to want), c. gen. rei, there is need of, there is wanting, Lat. opus est re, οὐδὲν δεῖ τινός Hdt., attic:—phrases, πολλοῦ δεῖ there wants much, far from it; ὀλίγου δεῖ there wants little, all but:— in answers, πολλοῦ γε δεῖ, πολλοῦ γε καὶ δεῖ far from it, Ar., Dem.; πλεῦνος δεῖ it…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-IAI-3S — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
53%it behooves
it behooves53% · 56×it is necessary8% · 9×it was necessary for7% · 7×it is necessary for7% · 7×it was necessary6% · 6×necessary3% · 3×needing3% · 3×other renderings12% · 13×other renderings2% · 2×

106 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 102 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὅς
ἐναὐτόςὥραan hour, season
ὅτιthat, since, because
αὐτόςλέγωI say, speakσύ
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, εὐαγγελίζωI bring good newτίςIrg
σύ
οἶκοςa house, househoλέγωI say, speakτίςIrg
οὐNeg
ὅπουwhere, whitherἔτοςa yearκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
δεῖIt was necessary [for you]102×
what comes after →
ἐγώ
λαλέωI speak, sayσύνσυναποθνῄσκωI die together w
αὐτός
εἰςπολύςmuch, many, ofteἐκ
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenἀναγινώσκωI readβασιλείαkingship, sovere
γάρfor
Article theγίνομαιI come into beinοὗτος
σύ
οὖνtherefore, thenγεννάωI beget, bring fεἷςone

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδεῖ · 102× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Revelation Mark 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians Hebrews Romans Titus

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 19 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.23c. AD 75–95

ὁ δʼ ἡμέτερος νομοθέτης ἀκραιφνῆ τὴν ἀρετὴν ἔχοντα τὸν θεὸν ἀποφήνας ᾠήθη δεῖν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνης πειρᾶσθαι μεταλαμβάνειν καὶ τοὺς μὴ ταῦτα φρονοῦντας μηδὲ μὴν πιστεύοντας ἀπαραιτήτως ἐκόλασε.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.1c. AD 100

Δεῖ οὖν ἡμᾶς περὶ τῶν ἐνεστώτων ἐπιπολὺ ἐραυνῶντας ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δυνάμενα ἡμᾶς σώζειν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Syrien253 BC

λοιπὰ τὰ ἐνταῦθα ὡς ἂν ἐκποιῆι πειρῶ ἐπισκοπεῖν· οὕτως γὰρ ἡμῖν μᾶλλον ἔσται τὰ δέοντα. καὶ τὰ γενημάτια δὲ ἵνα τρόπωι τινὶ συγκομισθῆι ἐπιμελές σοι ἔστω. καὶ ἐάν τι

P.Grenf. 1 11Arsinoites182 BC

προσταχθέντος Ἑρμοκράτει τῶι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι, τὸν ὅρκον ἐπιτελεσθῆναι, τοῦ δὲ χρόνου ἐν ὧι τὸν ὅρκον ἔδει ἐπιτελεῖσθαι μήπω ἐνεστηκότος, ἐπέδωκάν σοι ἄλλο ὑπόμνημα κατʼ ἐμοῦ ἐπιβαλόντι ἐπὶ τοὺς τοπους

P.Dryton 43155 BC–143 BC

ἐδώκαμεν αὐτῶι γράστεως τοῖς κτήνεσι … ἐφʼ ἁμάξης εἰς δέοντα … … που πυροῦ ιθ 𐅵 … … αὐταὶ ἐν τῶι ἐπὶ κλίμακος

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
μέν,men indeed, G3303 Particle
180× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'on the other hand' and is often used to contrast ideas. It appears in the New Testament, like in John and Romans, to show a difference between two things. It's usually translated as 'even' or 'indeed'.
Tyndale gloss
on the other hand
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μέν is a particle that typically indicates a contrast with a following clause, often paired with δέ. It can express certainty or affirmation, but is frequently left untranslated. In the New Testament, it appears in various constructions, such as ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ (the one ... the other) and τοῦτο μὲν ... τοῦτο δέ (partly ... partly). Its usage is less common than in classical Greek.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μέν,

conjunctive particle (originally a form of μήν), usually related to a following δέ or other adversative conjunction, and distinguishing the word or clause with which it stands from that which follows.

It is generally untranslatable and is not nearly so frequent in NT as in cl. Like δέ, it never stands first in a clause.

Answered by δέ or some other particle: μὲν . . . δέ, indeed . . . but, Mt 3:11, Lk 3:16, al.; with pronouns, ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, one . . . another, Mt 21:35, al.; pl., Phl 1:16, 17; ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δὲ . . . ὃ δέ, some . . . some . . . some, Mt 13:8; τοῦτο μὲν . . . τοῦτο δέ, partly . . . partly, He…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μέν, a weakened form of μήν, and hence properly a particle of affirmation: truly, certainly, surely, indeed, —its affirmative force being weakened, yet retained most in Ionic, Epic, and Herodotus, and not wholly lost in Attic and Hellenistic writers (μέν ‘confirmative’; ef. 4 Mace. xviii. 18). Owing to this its original meaning it adds a certain force to the terms and phrases with which it is connected, and thus contrasts them with or distinguishes ther. from others. Accordingly it takes on the character of a concessive and very often of a merely distinctive particle, which stands related to a following δέ or other adversative conjunction, either expressed or understood, and in a sentence composed of several members is so placed as to point out the first member, to which a second, marked by an adversative particle, is added or opposed. It corresponds to the Lat. quidem, indeed, Germ.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μέν, an untranslatable particle, was originally a form of μήν (g.v.). The correlation μὲν... δέ, so common in classical Greek, is largely reduced in the NT (cf. Blass Gr. p. 266 f.). For μέν solitartum, i.e. μέν followed by no contrasting particle, as in Rom 1® πρῶτον μέν, a/., cf. BGU 11. 423? (ii/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 90) πρὸ μὲν πάντων εὔχομαί oe ὑγιαίνειν καὶ διὰ παντὸς ἐρωμένον (1. ἐρρωμένον) εὐτυχεῖν," 5 γράψον μοι ἐπιστόλιον πρῶτον μὲν περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας σου, δεύτερον περὶ τῆς τῶν ἀδελφῶν pov. The combination μὲν οὖν in narrative, summing up what precedes, or introducing what follows (Ac 18, 9%, αἰ. : cf. Blass Gr. p. 273), is seen in such passages as P Petr II. 13 (19) (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski?, p. 19) μάλιστα μὲν οὖν τῆν πᾶσαν σπουδὴν πόησαι [το]ῦ ἀφεθῆναί σε διὰ τέλους, P Lille I. 26? (111,8...) (= Witkowski, p. 49) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς τὴν σησαμείαν γῆς, μάλιστα δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέν (men) — on the other hand.

μέν,

Particle, used partly to express certainty on the part of the speaker or writer; partly, and more commonly, to point out that the word or clause with which it stands is correlative to another word or clause that is to follow, the latter word or clause being introduced by δέ.

__A

__A.I μέν used absolutely to express certainty, not followed by correlative δέ, indeed, of a truth, synonymous with μήν, as appears from the Epic dialect and Ionic dialect form ἦ μέν in protestations and oaths (where Attic dialect used ἦ μήν), καί μοι ὄμοσσον, ἦ μ. μοι πρόφρων ἔπεσιν καὶ χερσὶν ἀρήξειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Trag., ἀκτὴ μὲν ἥδε τῆς περιρρύτου χθονός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γε μέν, compare γε [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μέν

men

a primary particle; properly, indicative of affirmation or concession

(in fact); usually followed by a contrasted clause with 1161 (this

one, the former, etc.):--even, indeed, so, some, truly, verily. Often

compounded with other particles in an intensive or asseverative sense.

see GREEK for 1161

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μέν

Disj.prt.

truly, indeed

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μέν men 179x

a particle serving to indicate that the term or clause with which it is used stands distinguished from another, usually in the sequel, and then mostly with δέ correspondent, Mt. 3:11; 9:39; Acts 1:1; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, this ... that, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; one ... another, οἱ μὲν ... οἱ δέ, some ... others, Matt 22:5; ὅλλος μὲν ... ὅλλος δέ, one ... another, pl. some ... others, Matt 13:8; 21:35; ὅλλος μὲν ... ὅλλος δέ, one ... another, 1 Cor. 15:39; ὡδε μὲν ... ἐκεῖ δέ, here ... there, Heb.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μέν Particle, used to shew that the word or clause with which it stands answers to a following word or clause, which is introduced by δέ. Generally, μέν and δέ may be rendered on the one hand, on the other hand, or as well . . , as, while or whereas, but it is often necessary to leave μέν untranslated.

μέν is not always answered by δέ, but by other equiv. Particles, as ἀλλά, ἀτάρ or αὐτάρ, αὖ, αὖθις, αὖτε; also πρῶτον μέν, εἶτα Soph.; πρῶτον μέν, ἔπειτα id. Soph.; πρῶτον μέν, μετὰ τοῦτο Xen.

the answering clause with δέ is sometimes left to be supplied, ὡς μὲν λέγουσι as indeed they say, (but as I believe not), Eur.; this isolated μέν is often a Pron., ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ οἶδα I for my part, (whatever others may say), Xen.; οὗτος μέν Plat.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
95%indeed
indeed95% · 185×other renderings5% · 9×

194 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial8%predicate3%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 180 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςπειρασμόςtrial, testing,
ὅς
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςποιέωI do, make
ἐγώ
σύἸωάννηςJohnκαίand, even, also,
εἰCond
ἸουδαῖοςJewishκαίand, even, also,
πρῶτοςSup
τρόποςway, manner, chaἈβραάμPropσοφίαwisdom
μένindeed,180×
what comes after →
οὖνtherefore, then
καίand, even, also,στρατιώτηςa soldierδιασπείρωI scatter like s
γάρfor
Article theγνωστόςknown, an acquaiἴδιοςone’s own, priva
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thφωνήa sound, noise, ἁμαρτίαa sin
εἰμίI am, exist
ΠαῦλοςPaulArticle theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐκ
Article theδεξιόςon the right hanἀγάπηlove

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμέν · 180× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew Romans Luke 2 Corinthians John Mark Philippians 1 Peter 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐν ἀρούραις ἑπτὰ καὶ τοῦ προσόντος χαλάσματος ἐν σφραγῖσι δυσίν , ὧν γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πελαίου

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

πεδίωι Παθύρεως σφραγίδων τριῶν , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πα-νᾶτος τοῦ Πατῆτος, μιᾶς μὲν γείτονες νότου γῆ Πατήφιος τοῦ Πεμσάϊος βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος ἧς κρατοῦσιν οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ō O G5599 Interj
17× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
An expression of address or surprise, like saying 'oh' or 'O', as in Matthew 15:28 and Acts 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
oh!
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word (ō) is an interjection used primarily as a vocative address, meaning 'O!' or 'Oh!'. It expresses surprise, joy, or pain and appears in various contexts, including direct address and exclamations. In the New Testament, it is found in passages such as Matthew 15:28 and Romans 11:33. The lexicons do not indicate significant disagreement regarding its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

interj., c. vocat.,

O;

in simple address (less freq. than in cl.; M, Pr., 71); Ac 1:1 18:14 27:21, Ro 2:1, 3 9:20, I Ti 6:20; expressing reproof, Ja 2:20;

in exclamations of surprise, etc.: Mt 15:28, Lk 24:25, Ac 13:10, Ro 11:33, Ga 3:1; c. nom. (Bl., § 33, 4), Mt 17:17, Mk 9:19, Lk 9:41.†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὦ (ō) — oh!.

and ὤ, an exclamation, expressing surprise, joy, or pain, O! oh! with nominative, ὢ τάλας ἐγώ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with genitive, ὢ τῆς ἀναισχυντίας [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; with interrogative, ὤ, τί λέγει; [Refs]; in the middle of a sentence, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. with vocative, a mode of address, whether at the beginning of a sentence or in a parenthesis, ὦ Ἀχιλεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in invocations of the gods, ὦ Ζεῦ τε καὶ Γῆ καὶ πολισσοῦχοι θεοί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὦ πρὸς θεῶν ὕπεικε [Refs 4th c.BC+]: sometimes following the Verb, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in different number from the vocative, προσέλθετ᾽, ὦ παῖ, πατρί [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

o

a primary interjection; as a sign of the vocative case, O; as a note

of exclamation, oh:--O.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ij.

O, an exclamation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὦ ō 17x

O!, Mt. 15:28; Mk. 9:19; Acts 1:1; Rom. 2:1, 3; 11:33

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Interj — Interj
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%o
o100% · 17×

17 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 17 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἸησοῦςJesusαὐτός
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakπρός
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
περί
πονηρόςevil, bad, wicked
ῥᾳδιούργημαan act of villai
μένDisj
δεῖit is necessary,
O17×
what comes after →
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
πᾶςall, the whole, Article theμενοῦνDisj
γενεάa generation
ἄπιστοςunbelieving, inc
ἀνόητοςfoolish, thoughtless
καίand, even, also,Γαλάτηςa Galatian
γυνήa woman, wife, my la
μέγας
ΘεόφιλοςTheophilus
ὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 17× in the New Testament
Acts Romans 1 Timothy Luke Matthew Galatians James Mark
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 30 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ἄνδρες,anēr men, G435 Noun · vocative · plural · masculine
216× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A man in the Bible refers to an adult male, often in contrast to a woman or child. It can also describe a husband, as seen in Matthew 1:16 and Romans 7:2. The term is used to address or describe individuals, such as a prophet or brother.
Amplified meaning
sirs, gentlemen
Tyndale gloss
man
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀνήρ (anēr) means 'man' in various contexts, distinguishing adult males from women and children. It can refer to a husband or a male person in general, and is often used in conjunction with other nouns or adjectives. The New Testament employs it similarly, as seen in verses like Matthew 1:16 and 1 Corinthians 13:11. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ, freq. אֱנוֹשׁ, also אָדָם, etc.;]

a man, Lat. vir.

As opp. to a woman, Ac 8:12, I Ti 2:12; as a husband, Mt 1:16, Jo 4:16, Ro 7:2, Tit 1:6.

As opp. to a boy or infant, I Co 13:11, Eph 4:13, Ja 3:2.

In appos. with a noun or adj., as ἀ. ἁμαρτωλός, Lk 5:8; ἀ. προφήτης, 24:19; freq. in terms of address, as ἀ. ἀδελφοί, Ac 1:16; and esp. with…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ, a man, Lat. vir. The meanings of this word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage ; for it is employed 1. with a reference to sex, and so to distinguish a man from a woman; either a. asa male: Acts viii. 12; xvii.12; 1 Tim.ii.12; or b. asa husband: Mt.i.16; Mk. x.2; Jn. iv. 16 sqq.; Ro..vii. 2 sqq:; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq.; Gal. iv. 27; 1 Tim. iii. 2,12; Tit. i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband: Mt.i.19; Rev. xxi. 2, ete. 2. with a reference to age, and to distinguish an adult man from a boy: Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38 (where ἄνδρες, γυναῖκες and παιδία are discriminated) ; with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue: 1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to νήπιος) ; Eph. iv. 13; Jas. iii. 2, (in the last two pass. τέλειος ἀνήρ). 3. univ. any male person, a man; so where tis might have been used: Lk. viii. 41; ix.38; Acts νἱ. 11; x.5,ete. where ἀνήρ and τὶς are united…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀνήρ. The special differentia of ἀνήρ : ἄνθρωπος survives in MGr (ἄντρας, ἄθρωπος), where even the old gen. sing. (ἀντρός) may still be found beside the ‘‘regular” τοῦ ἄντρα (Thumb Handbook, p. 48). Naturally there is nothing particular to record in the uses of this everyday word, which has in NT and Hellenistic generally much the same range as in class. Gk. Thus, taking the index to BGU IV., we can illustrate many of the uses noted for the NT in Grimm from documents of the Augustan period. So (1) husband by the perpetual phrase μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἀνδρός after the name of a woman, as 1126* (where ἀνδρός is written over an erased ὁμομητρίου ἀδελφοῦ), or in a marriage contract as τορϑ τηρεῖν τὰ πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρᾳ καὶ τὸν κοινὸν βίον δίκαια, while the document will also use ἀνήρ for irregular relations in the pledge μηδ᾽ ἄλλωι ἀνδρὶ συνεῖναι. Then under Grimm’s (3) we have 1189" of σημαινόμενοι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνήρ (anēr) — man.

ἀνήρ, ὁ, ἀνδρός, ἀνδρί, ἄνδρα,

vocative ἄνερ: plural ἄνδρες, -δρῶν, -δράσι [ᾰ], -dras: Aeolic dialect dative plural ἄνδρεσι[Refs 7th c.BC+] for οἱ ἄνδρε; the Ionic dialect crasis is ὡνήρ, ὧνδρες, [Refs 5th c.BC+] [Epic dialect Poets mostly use ᾱ in arsi, ᾰ in thesi; but in trisyllable forms with stem ἀνέρ- always ; so also Trag. in Lyric poetry, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in nominative by analogy; cf. Sanskrit nar- from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] ner-, nṛ- from nṛ-, Gk. ἀνδρ- from ṇr-):—man, opposed to woman (ἄνθρωπος being man as opposed to to beast), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἄπαις without male children, [Refs 8th c.BC+] mostly of princes, leaders, etc., but also of free men; ἀ δήμου one of the people, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with a qualifying word to indicate rank, ἀ. βουληφόρος[Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνήρ

aner

a primary word (compare 444); a man (properly as an individual

male):--fellow, husband, man, sir.

see GREEK for 444

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ

n.m.

a male human being, a man

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνήρ anēr 216x

a male person of full age and stature, as opposed to a child or female, 1 Cor. 13:11; a husband, Mt. 1:16; a man, human being, individual, Lk. 11:31; used also pleonastically with other nouns and adjectives, Lk. 5:8; Acts 1:16

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀνήρ Root ΑΝΕΡ a man, Lat. vir (not homo):

a man, opp. to a woman, Hom., etc.

a man, opp. to a god, πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε id. Hom.

a man, opp. to a youth, a man in the prime of life, id. Hom., etc.; εἰς ἄνδρας ἐγγράφεσθαι to be enrolled among the men, Dem.

a man emphatically, a man indeed, ἀνέρες ἔστε, φίλοι Il.; πολλοὶ μὲν ἄνθρωποι, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἄνδρες many human beings, but few men, Hdt.

a man, opp. to his wife, a husband, Hom., etc.; αἰγῶν ἄνερ, Virgil's vir gregis, Theocr.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-VPM — Noun · vocative · plural · masculine
vocative — the one being addressed.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-VPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Vocative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%men
men40% · 86×man34% · 74×husband18% · 39×husbands6% · 13×other renderings2% · 5×

217 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject38%object18%adverbial13%predicate12%indirect object6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 216 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, mαὐτός
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,πνεῦμαwind, breath, spΠαῦλοςPaul
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,εἰρήνηpeace, peace of αὐτός
αὐτός
πρόςἐκοἶδαI know, remember
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐσθίωI eatὁδόςa way, road, jouἀθέμιτοςillegal, unlawfu
ἀνήρmen,216×
what comes after →
Article the
τόποςa placeξηρόςdry, withered, dσυνίστημιI commend, prove
ἀδελφόςa brother
καίand, even, also,ἐγώδεῖit is necessary,
ὅς
ὄνομαname, character,ἵστημιI cause to standἔμπροσθεν
αὐτός
δίκαιοςjust, righteous,γαμέωI marryἐάνCond
οὗτος
ἀληθήςunconcealed, truὅσοςοὔτεNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀνήρ · 216× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Luke Romans John Matthew Ephesians James 1 Timothy Mark 1 Peter Colossians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 502 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.8c. AD 75–95

ἦσαν δέ τινες, οἳ πόθῳ τῆς ἱστορίας ἐπʼ αὐτήν με προύτρεπον, καὶ μάλιστα δὴ πάντων Ἐπαφρόδιτος ἀνὴρ ἅπασαν μὲν ἰδέαν παιδείας ἠγαπηκώς, διαφερόντως δὲ χαίρων ἐμπειρίαις πραγμάτων, ἅτε δὴ μεγάλοις μὲν αὐτὸς ὁμιλήσας πράγμασι καὶ τύχαις πολυτρόποις,…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 8.1c. AD 100

Τίνα δὲ δοκεῖτε τύπον εἶναι, ὅτι ἐντέταλται τῷ Ἰσραὴλ προσφέρειν δάμαλιν τοὺς ἄνδρας, ἐν οἷς εἰσὶν ἁμαρτίαι τέλειαι, καὶ σφάξαντας κατακαίειν, καὶ αἴρειν τότε τὴν σποδὸν παιδία καὶ βάλλειν εἰς ἄγγη καὶ περιτιθέναι τὸ ἔριον τὸ κόκκινον ἐπὶ ξύλον ʽἴδε…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

διέθετο ὑγιαίνων νοῶν φρονῶν Δρύτων Παμφίλου Κρὴς τῶν διαδόχων καὶ τοῦ ἐπιτάγματος ἱππάρχης ἐπʼ ἀνδρῶν· εἴη μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι· ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

διέθετο ὑγιαίνων νοῶν φρονῶν Δρύτων Παμφίλου Κρὴς τῶν διαδόχων καὶ τοῦ ἐπιτάγματος ἱππάρχης ἐπʼ ἀνδρῶν. εἴη μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι. ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

Ἡλιοδώρου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Πανερεῦς Γούνσιος Πέρσης καὶ Σενενοῦπις Φίβιος Περσίνη μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῆς ἀνδρὸς Πανερεῦτος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου, Πανεβχούνει καὶ Ὥρωι καὶ Φίβει καὶ Πασήμει τοῖς τέσσαρσι τῶν ἐκ

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
πειθαρχήσαντάςpeitharcheō having been obedient G3980 Verb · aorist · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To obey means to submit to authority or follow advice, as seen in Acts 5:29 where the apostles obeyed God rather than man. It involves heeding or listening to those in charge, like magistrates or leaders, as mentioned in Titus 3:1.
Amplified meaning
listened to me, obeyed my counsel
Tyndale gloss
to obey
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πειθαρχέω (i.e., *peitharcheo*) is built from the roots for 'persuade' and 'authority.' It means to obey someone in authority, covering contexts of submission to rulers or advice. The New Testament uses it in Acts and Titus, indicating obedience to God and magistrates. There is a note on its unusual construction with the genitive case, which is also found in ancient texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πειθαρχέω, -ῶ

(< πείθομαι, ἀρχή),

[in LXX: Da LXX 7:27 (שְׁמַע), Si 30:38 (33:28), I Es 8:94*;]

to obey one in authority, be obedient: Tit 3:1; c. dat., Ac 27:21; θεῷ, Ac 5:29, 32.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πειθαρχέω, -ῶ ; 1 aor. ptep. πειθαρχήσας ; (πείθαρχος; and this fr. πείθομαι and ἀρχή) ; to obey (a ruler or a superior): θεῷ, Acts v. 29, 32; magistrates, Tit. iii. 1 [al. take it here absol. to be obedient]; τῷ λόγῳ τῆς δικαιοσύνης, Polye. ad Philipp. 9,1; [A. V- to hearken to] one advising something, Acts xxvii. 21. (Soph., Xen., Polyb., Diod.. Joseph., Plut., al.; on the very freq. use of the verb by Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. 8. w. p. 43 [esp. p. 108].)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πειθαρχέω. The unusual constr. c. gen. = ‘‘ obey” one in authority is found both in the papyri and in the inscrr., as in the marriage contracts P Tebt I. 104! (B.c. 92) ἔ]στω δὲ ᾿Απολλωνίαι πία]ρὰ Φιλίσκωι πειθαρχοῦσα α[ὐ]τοῦ ὡς προσῆ[κό]ν ἐστιν γυναῖκα ἀνδρός, ““ Apollonia shall remain with Philiscus, obeying him as a wife should her husband” (Edd.), P Oxy II. 2651* (A.D. 81-95) bo[a δ]εῖ πειθαρχεῖν γαμετὴν γυναῖκα ἀνδρός, and in Sy// 2 (= % 22)? (B.c. 494) πυνθάνομαι σὲ TOV ἐμῶν ἐπιταγμάτων οὐ κατὰ πάντα πειθαρχεῖν. For πειθαρχέω c. dat., as in Ac 2774, cf. P Oxy XII. 14111 (A.D, 260) εἰ μὴ πειθαρχήσιαν τῇδε τ[ῇ παρ]αγγελίᾳ, and A/agn 114° πειθαρχεῖν δὲ π[άν]τως τοῖς ὑπὲρ τοῦ κοινῇ συμφέροντος ἐπιταττομένοις, and for the verb absolutely, as in Tit 31, cf. OGZS 4837° (ii/a.D.) ἐὰν δὲ μηδ᾽ οὕτω πειθαρχῶσιν οἱ ἰδιῶται, ἔκδοσιν ποιείσθωσαν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πειθαρχέω (peitharcheō) — to obey.

πειθαρχ-έω,

obey one in authority, absolutely, πειθαρχεῖ.., ἄπληκτος ὥσπερ ἵππος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡς ἂν.. τοῖς πηδαλίοις ἡ ναῦς π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; στρατηγοῦ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; τινος [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—middle, ἔθνος.. πειθαρχέεσθαι ἑτοῖμον [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πειθαρχέω

peitharcheo

from a compound of 3982 and 757; to be persuaded by a ruler, i.e.

(genitive case) to submit to authority; by analogy, to conform to

advice:--hearken, obey (magistrates).

see GREEK for 3982

see GREEK for 757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πειθαρχέω

v.

I obey one in authority

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πειθαρχέω peitharcheō 4x

to obey one in authority, Acts 5:29, 32; Tit. 3:1; genr. to obey, follow, or conform to advice, Acts 27:21*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πειθαρχέω πειθαρχέω, φυτ. -ήσω to obey one in authority, c. dat., π. πατρί Soph.; τοῖς νόμοις Ar.: absol. to be obedient, Arist.:—so in Mid., Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-APM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%obey
obey25% · 1×obeying25% · 1×having been obedient25% · 1×be obedient25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀπόστολοςan apostle, a me
Article the
θεόςGod, a god
ἀνήρa male human being,
O, an exclamatio
ὑποτάσσωI place under, subje
ἐξουσίαpower, authority
πειθαρχέωhaving been obedient
what comes after →
δεῖit is necessary, ine
θεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
ἐγώ
μήNeg
πρός
πᾶςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπειθαρχέω · 4× in the New Testament
Acts Titus
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 167c. AD 40

ἡ μὲν γυνὴ σφοδρὰς ἀνίας ἐνδεξαμένη τὰς ἐν ὠδῖσι καὶ τὰς παρὰ τὸν ἄλλον βίον λύπας ἐπαλλήλους καὶ μάλιστα τὰς ἐπὶ τέκνοις γεννωμένοις καὶ τρεφομένοις καὶ νοσοῦσι καὶ ὑγιαίνουσι καὶ εὐτυχοῦσι καὶ ἀτυχοῦσιν, εἶτ’ ἀφαίρεσιν ἐλευθερίας καὶ τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 13.189c. AD 75–95

ὁ δʼ ἕτοιμον εἰς μάχην γνοὺς τὸν Ἰωνάθην ὑπέρχεται δώροις αὐτὸν καὶ φιλοφρονήσει, καὶ τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν αὐτοῦ πειθαρχεῖν Ἰωνάθῃ προσέταξεν, τούτοις πιστώσασθαι βουλόμενος εὔνοιαν καὶ πᾶσαν ὑπόνοιαν ἐξελεῖν εἰς τὸ καταφρονήσαντα λαβεῖν ἀφύλακτον οὐδὲν…

PolycarpPolycarp to the Philippians 9.1c. AD 110

Παρακαλῶ οὖν πάντας ὑμᾶς, πειθαρχεῖν τῷ λόγῳ τῆς δικαιοσύνης καὶ ἀσκεῖν πᾶσαν ὑπομονήν, ἣν καὶ εἴδατε κατ̓ ὀφθαλμοὺς οὐ μόνον ἐν τοῖς μακαρίοις Ἰγνατίῳ καὶ Ζωσίμῳ καὶ Ῥούφῳ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν ἄλλοις τοῖς ἐξ ὑμῶν καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τοῖς λοιποῖς…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Oxy. 2 372 descr.OxyrhynchosAD 74–AD 75

Σένενφι ἐνδημῶν καὶ ἀποδημῶν κατὰ δύναμιν τῶν ὑπαρχόντων, πειθαρχείτω δὲ Σένενφις Ἐνθέσμῳ ὅσα δεῖ πειθαρχεῖν γαμετὴν γυναῖκα ἀνδρός, καὶ κυριευέτωσαν … καὶ καταχρώμενοι εἰς τὴν ἑαυτῶν βιοτείαν μέρος

P.Oxy. 2 265OxyrhynchosAD 81–AD 96

αὐτῆς … … ἄλλων καταχρηματίζειν ἢ πᾶν τὸ ὑπʼ ἐναντίων … … ὅσα δεῖ πειθαρχεῖν γαμετὴν γυναῖκα ἀνδρί, καὶ κυριευέτωσαν κοινῇ … … μηδὲ κακουχεῖν αὐτὴν μηδʼ ἀποκλείειν μηδενὸς

P.Oxy. 3 604 descr.OxyrhynchosAD 101–AD 200

τὰ δὲ δέοντα πάντα κατὰ δύναμιν … πειθαρχείτω δὲ … ὅσα δεῖ πειθαρχεῖν γαμετὴν γυναῖκα ἀνδρὸς καὶ κυριευέτωσαν κοινῇ … καὶ καταχρώμενοι … εἰς τὴν ἑαυτῶν βιοτείαν

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
μοιegō to me G3165 Personal pronoun · first person · dative · singular
1,872× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
I/we
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-1DS — Personal pronoun · first person · dative · singular
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1DS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Dative Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%us
us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
μὴ not G3361 Particle · negative
1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.
Tyndale gloss
not
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή () is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
71%not
not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ
ἵναin order that, so th
αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
εἰCond
αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά
μήnot1060×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,
εἰμίI am, exist
δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά
τὶς
σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f
φοβέωI fear, am terrified
ἀπόArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ἀνάγεσθαιanagō to have set sail G321 Verb · present · passive · infinitive
23× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To lead or bring something up, like Jesus being led into the wilderness in Matthew 4:1.
Tyndale gloss
to lead
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀνάγω is built from the prefix ἀν- meaning 'up' and the root ἄγω meaning 'to lead.' It covers a range of meanings including to lead up, to offer sacrifices, and to set sail. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as leading Jesus into the wilderness (Mt 4:1) and setting sail (Lk 8:22).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀν-άγω

[in LXX chiefly for עָלָה hi.;]

to lead or bring up: seq. είς, c. acc. loc., Mt 4:1, Lk 2:22 4:5 (WH om. είς, κ.τ.λ.), Ac 9:39 16:34; of raising the dead (cl.), ἐκ νεκρῶν, Ro 10:7, He 13:20; to produce and set before, τ. λαῷ, Ac 12:4 (MM, VGT, s.v.); in sacrificial sense (MM, VGT, s.v.), to offer, θυσίαν, Ac 7:41. Mid., in nautical sense (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., al.), to put to sea: Lk 8:22, Ac…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀν-άγω : 2 aor. ἀνήγαγον, inf. ἀναγαγεῖν, [ptep. dvayayov]; Pass., [pres. avayopar]; 1 aor. [ef. sub fin.] ἀνήχθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to lead up, to lead or bring into a higher place; foll. by εἰς with acc. of the place: Lk. ii. 22; iv. 5 [Δ Tr WH om. Lbr. the cl.]; xxii. 66 [T Tr WH ἀπήγαγον); Acts ix. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 (εἰς τ. ἔρημον, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan). τινὰ ἐκ νεκρῶν fr. the dead in the world below, to the upper world, Heb. xiii. 20; Ro. x. 7; τινὰ τῷ λαῷ to bring one forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place), and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4; θυσίαν τῷ εἰδώλῳ to offer sacrifice to the idol, because the victim is lifted up on the altar, Acts vii. 41. Navigators are κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν said ἀνάγεσθαι (pass. [or mid. ]) when they /aunch out, set sail, put to sea, (so ἀναγωγή in Justin. Mart. dial. ο. Tr. c. 142 [and in the elassies])…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνάγω (anagō) — to lead.

ἀνάγω,

future ἀνάξω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἀνήγαγον, etc.: (see. ἄγω):—opposed to κατάγω,

I. lead up from a lower place to a higher, ἐς Ολυμπον[Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱερὸν ἀ. ξόανον, of the Trojan horse, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ πέπλος ἀνάγεται εἰς τὴν ἀκρόπολιν [Refs]

I.2. lead up to the high sea, carry by sea, λαὸν ἀνήγαγεν ἐνθάδ᾽ ἀείρας[Refs 8th c.BC+] conduct, carry to a place, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀ. ναῦν put a ship to sea, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγειν absolutely in the same sense, [Refs 4th c.BC+] —but this is more common in middle, see infr. B.I.

I.3. take up from the coast into the interior, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially from Asia Minor into Central Asia, ἀ. παρὰ or ὡς βασιλέα[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνάγω

anago

from 303 and 71; to lead up; by extension to bring out; specially, to

sail away:--bring (again, forth, up again), depart, launch (forth),

lead (up), loose, offer, sail, set forth, take up.

see GREEK for 303

see GREEK for 71

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνάγω

v.

I lead up, put to sea, set sail

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνάγω anagō 23x

to conduct; to lead or convey up from a lower place to a higher, Lk. 4:5; to offer up, as a sacrifice, Acts 7:41; to lead out, produce, Acts 12:4; as a nautical term (in the middle or passive), to set sail, put to sea, Lk. 8:22

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀνάγω to lead up from a lower place to a higher, Theogn., etc.

to lead up to the high sea, to carry by sea, Hom., etc.; ἀν. ναῦν to put a ship to sea, Hdt.; absol. in the same sense, id. Hdt.; —this is more common in Mid.

to take up from the coast into the interior, Od., Hdt.; esp. from Asia Minor into Central Asia, Xen.

to bring up from the dead, Hes., Aesch.

ἀν. χορόν to conduct the choir, Hes., Eur., etc.; also, ἀν. ὁρτήν to celebrate a festival, Hdt.

to lift up, raise, κάρα, τὸ ὄμμα Soph., etc.

ἀν. παιᾶνα to lift up the paean, id. Soph.

in various senses, ἀν. αἷμα to bring up blood, Plut.; ἀν. ποταμόν to bring a river up [over its banks], Luc.; ἀν. φάλαγγα, like ἀναπτύσσειν, Plut.; to bring up a prisoner for examination, Xen., etc.

to bring back, Hom., etc.

to refer a matter to another, Dem.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PPN — Verb · present · passive · infinitive
present passive infinitive — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5745

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%they brought
they brought9% · 2×having sailed9% · 2×having brought9% · 2×we set sail9% · 2×offered4% · 1×bring out4% · 1×he sailed4% · 1×sail4% · 1×other renderings48% · 11×

23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 19 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb96%adverbial4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
λίμνηa lakeἐκεῖνοςἐγώ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article the
ΜωϋσῆςMoses
νόμοςa law, the Mosai
παραγίνομαιI appear, come, arri
ὅς
πάσχαAram
Article the
ἀνάγωto have set sail23×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article the
αὐτός
εἰςδείκνυμιI point out, shoArticle the
δέbut, on the other ha
ἀπό
ἀπό
Article the
θυσίαa sacrifice
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀνάγω · 23× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Hebrews Matthew Romans
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 54 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Husbandry 127c. AD 40

οὐ διὰ τοῦτο μέντοι δόξαντι θυσίας ἀμέμπτους ἀναγαγεῖν τῷ Κάιν λόγιον ἐξέπεσε μὴ θαρρεῖν ὡς κεκαλλιερηκότι;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.21c. AD 75–95

τοῦτο δὴ παιδεῦσαι βουληθεὶς Μωυσῆς τὸ παίδευμα τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ πολίτας τῆς τῶν νόμων θέσεως οὐκ ἀπὸ συμβολαίων καὶ τῶν πρὸς ἀλλήλους δικαίων ἤρξατο τοῖς ἄλλοις παραπλησίως, ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν καὶ τὴν τοῦ κόσμου κατασκευὴν τὰς γνώμας αὐτῶν ἀναγαγὼν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD

τοὺς μισθοὺς κατὰ τὴν ἐμὴν διαγραφὴν κελεύω. τοὺς δὲ ἀντιλέγοντας ἐπὶ τὸν γραμματέα μου ἀνάγεσθαι βούλομαι, ὃς ἢ αὐτὸς κωλύσει ἀδικεῖσθαι τοὺς ἰδιώτας ἢ ἐμοὶ ἀνανγελεῖ. τὰ δὲ διὰ

P.Mich. 9 525Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 119–AD 124

τὰ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ … ρκλερ … τρόπῳ ἐβάσταξε. ὅθεν τὸν ἀρχέφοδον τῆς κώμης ἀνήγαγον ὃς ἐχειρογράφησε τὸν προκείμενον ἀδελφὸν εἶναι τὸν ἐπελθόντα. διὸ πεποίηκα τήν σοι … α

P.Vars. 11Arsinoites (?)AD 138–AD 161

δ εἰκοστὸν λβ ἀπὸ ἀνηγμένης ἐπὶ οὐσίαν ἀποφορᾶς … … παραδείσου ἀπὸ ἐπιγραφομένης ἀμπέλου ἀναχθῆναι τῷ ιβ ἔτει ἀποφορὰν … … ωθ ἐκκεκόφθαι καὶ ἀναχθῆναι ἀμπέλου ἀρούρας δ η

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ἀπὸapo from G575 Preposition
647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.
Tyndale gloss
away from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%from
from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen
Article the
τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά
ἀπόfrom647×
what comes after →
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
τῆςho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
Κρήτης,Krētē Crete, G2914 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Crete is an island in the Mediterranean, mentioned in Acts 27 and Titus 1:5. The island was an important stop for the apostle Paul during his travels. It is also where Titus was left to oversee the churches.
Amplified meaning
to have remained in Crete, avoiding the storm
Tyndale gloss
Crete
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The word Κρήτη (i.e., Krete) refers to the island of Crete in the Mediterranean. It appears in several New Testament passages, including Acts 27 and Titus 1. The entries indicate its historical significance, noting its ancient name and references in epic poetry.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Κρήτη, -ης, ἡ,

Crete: Ac 27:7, 12, 13, 31, Tit 1:5.†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Κρήτη (Krētē) — Crete.

Crete , now Candia , [8th/7th c.BC]; epic genitive plural Κρητάων εὐρειάων [8th/7th c.BC] (Middle Liddel)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Κρήτη

Krete

of uncertain derivation; Crete, an island in the

Mediterranean:--Crete.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Κρήτη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

Crete

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Κρήτη Krētē 5x

Crete, a large island in the eastern part of the Mediterranean, Acts 27:7, 12f., 21, Tit. 1:5*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

Κρήτη Κρήτη, ἡ, Crete, now Candia, Hom.; epic gen. pl. Κρητάων εὐρειάων Od.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kret (Krete, ethnic Kretes, Ac 2:11; Tit 1:12): An island bounding the Aegean Sea on the South. It stretches from 34 degrees 50' to 35 degrees 40' North latitude and from 23 degrees 30' to 26 degrees 20' East long. With Cythera on the North and Carpathos and Rhodos on the Northeast, it forms a continuous bridge between Greece and Asia Minor. The center of the island is formed by a mountain chain rising to a height of 8,193 ft. in Mt. Ida, and fringed with low valleys beside the coast. There are no considerable rivers; the largest, the Metropole, on the South, is a tiny stream, fordable anywhere. An island of considerable extent (156 miles long, and from 7 to 30 miles broad), in several districts very fertile and possessing one or two good harbors, it seems marked out by its…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Crete

Now called Candia, one of the largest islands in the Meditterranean, about 140 miles long and 35 broad. It was at one time a very prosperous and populous island, having a “hundred cities.” The character of the people is described in Paul’s quotation from “one of their own poets” (Epimenides) in his epistle to Titus: “The Cretans are alway liars, evil beasts, slow bellies” (Titus 1:12). Jews from Crete were in Jerusalem on the day of Pentecost (Acts 2:11). The island was visited by Paul on his voyage to Rome (Acts 27). Here Paul subsequently left Titus (1:5) “to ordain elders.” Some have supposed that it was the original home of the Caphtorim (q.v.) or Philistines.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

the modern Candia. This large island, which closes int he Greek Archipelago on the south, extends through a distance of 140 miles between its extreme points. Though exceedingly bold and mountainous, this island has very fruitful valleys, and in early times it was celebrated for its hundred cities. It seems likely that a very early acquaintances existed between the Cretans and the Jews. Cretans, (Acts 2:11) were among those who were at Jerusalem at the great Pentecost. In [Acts 27:7-12 We have an account of Paul’s shipwreck near this island; and it is evident from (Titus 1:5) that the apostle himself was here at no long interval of time before he wrote the letter. The Cretans were proverbial liars. (

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%crete
crete100% · 5×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ὑποπλέωI sail underλιμήνa harbor, portπαραλέγομαιI coast along, s
ἐν
σύ
ΚρήτηCrete,
what comes after →
κατά
ΣαλμώνηSalmone
βλέπωI look, see
κατά
κερδαίνωI gain, win, avoid l
τέDisj
ἵναin order that, so th
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΚρήτη · 5× in the New Testament
Acts Titus
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Embassy to Gaius 282c. AD 40

καὶ οὐ μόνον αἱ ἤπειροι μεσταὶ τῶν Ἰουδαϊκῶν ἀποικιῶν εἰσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ νήσων αἱ δοκιμώταται, Εὔβοια, Κύπρος, Κρήτη.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 13.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Δημήτριος ὁ Δημητρίου παῖς πλεύσας εἰς τὴν Συρίαν ἀπὸ Κρήτης καὶ πολεμήσας τὸν Ἀλέξανδρον καὶ κρατήσας αὐτοῦ αὐτὸς ἐβασίλευσεν φιλίαν πρὸς Ἰωνάθην ποιησάμενος.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD
P.Bingen 77Alexandria (?)AD 101–AD 200

ἐλαίου Ἀτταλίου τῆς Κρήτης … τοῦ Σωζομένου … Ἐρινύες Τύχη Ἀσκληπ ἀρτάβαι … ἄγει … … ἐλαίου ἡμικάδια

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
κερδῆσαίkerdainō to have incurred G2770 Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
17× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To gain something, like in Matthew 25:16-17, means to get or acquire it, and can also mean to save oneself from something.
Amplified meaning
gained, avoided
Tyndale gloss
to gain
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κερδαίνω (i.e., *kerdainō*) means to gain or profit, either literally or figuratively. It covers a range of uses, including making a profit, winning someone over, or avoiding loss. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as gaining Christ (Phil 3:8) and making a profit (Jas 4:13). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** κερδαίνω,

[in Sm.: Jb 22:3*;]

to gain: c. acc., Mt 25:16, 17, 20, 22; τ. κόσμον, Mt 16:26, Mk 8:36, Lk 9:25; absol., to make profit, get gain: Ja 4:13. Metaph., c. acc. rei, to save oneself from, avoid: Ac 27:21 (Field, Notes, 145); c. acc. pers., to gain, win: Mt 18:15, I Co 9:19-22, Phl 3:8; pass., I Pe 3:1.†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κερδαίνω is used absolutely, as in Jas 415, in P Oxy XII. 1477} (question to an oracle—iii/iv A.D.) et κερδαίνω ἀπὸ τοῦ πράγματ[ος ; ‘‘am I to profit by the transaction?” (Edd.). Cf. Aristeas 270 ἐπανάγουσι πάντα πρὸς Td κερδαίνειν. For the translation ‘‘and so have been spared this injury and loss” in Ac 277! κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην καὶ τὴν ζημίαν, see Field JVores, p. 145.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κερδαίνω (kerdainō) — to gain.

κερδ-αίνω,

future - ᾰνῶ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect -ανέω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κερδήσω [NT+5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἐκέρδᾱνα [Refs 5th c.BC+] codices, etc.; Ionic dialect -ηνα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect κεκέρδαγκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:— passive, aorist participle κερδανθείς [Refs 1st c.BC+]: perfect κεκερδημένος [Refs 1st c.AD+]: (κέρδος):—gain, derive profit or advantage, κακὰ κ. make unfair gains, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τί κερδαν; what shall I gain? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τινί gain by a thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λόγον win fame, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρηστὰ κ. ἔπη receive fair words, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with participle, gain by doing.., εἰ δὲ κερδανῶ λέγων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Μεγάροισι κερδανέομεν περιεοῦσι we shall gain by Megara's preservation, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also κ. ὅτι.. [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, τὰ κερδανθέντα Phld. [prev.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κερδαίνω

kerdaino

from 2771; to gain (literally or figuratively):--(get) gain, win.

see GREEK for 2771

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κερδαίνω

v.

I gain, win, avoid loss

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κερδαίνω kerdainō 17x

to gain as a matter of profit, Mt. 25:17; to win, acquire possession of, Mt. 16:26; to profit in the avoidance of, to avoid, Acts 27:21; in NT Χριστόν, to win Christ, to become possessed of the privileges of the Gospel, Phil. 3:8; to win over from estrangement, Mt. 18:15; to win over to embrace the Gospel, 1 Cor. 9:19, 20, 21, 22; 1 Pet. 3:1; absol. to make gain, Jas. 4:13

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κερδαίνω κέρδος to gain, derive profit or advantage, κακὰ κ. to make unfair gains, Hes.; κ. ἔκ or ἀπό τινος Hdt., attic; πρός τινος Soph.; τί κερδανῶ; what shall I gain by it? Ar.:—c. part. to gain by doing, οὐδὲν ἐκμαθοῦσα κερδανεῖς Aesch., etc.

absol. to make profit, gain advantage, Hdt., attic:— to traffic, make merchandise, Soph.; κ. ἔπη to receive fair words, id. Soph.

like ἀπολαύω, to gain a loss, reap disadvantage from a thing, as, δάκρυα κ., Eur.; κ. ζημίαν NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
24%i may win
i may win24% · 4×i may gain12% · 2×i gained12% · 2×have incurred6% · 1×will make a profit6% · 1×they will be gained6% · 1×he shall gain6% · 1×you have gained6% · 1×other renderings24% · 4×

17 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 17 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐμπορεύομαιI travel as a me
τάλαντονa talent of silver o
πέντεIndecδύο
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
ὠφελέωI help, benefit,
ὅλοςall, the whole, enti
κόσμοςthe world, unive
ἀκούωI hear, listen
σύ
κερδαίνωto have incurred17×
what comes after →
Article the
κόσμοςthe world, univeδέbut, on the otheἀδελφόςa brother
ἄλλοςother, another, diff
πέντεIndecδύο
τέDisj
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκερδαίνω · 17× in the New Testament
Matthew 1 Corinthians 1 Peter Acts James Luke Mark Philippians
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Clement of Rome
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 10.39c. AD 75–95

οἱ δὲ τοῖς μὲν λόγοις οὐκ ἐπίστευον, παρʼ ὧν ἠδύναντο κερδῆσαι τὸ μηδενὸς πειραθῆναι κακοῦ, τοῖς δʼ ἔργοις ἔμαθον ἀληθῆ τὰ παρὰ τῶν προφητῶν.

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 6.2c. AD 96

τί γὰρ τὸ ὄφελος, ἐάν τις τὸν κόσμον ὅλον κερδήσῃ, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν ζημιωθῇ;

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
τεte then G5037 Particle
209× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A conjunction meaning and or both, used to connect words or ideas closely. Found in Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33, it shows a strong link between things.
Tyndale gloss
and/both
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τέ (te) is an enclitic copulative particle that functions similarly to the Latin '-que' and is used to denote a closer connection than the more general καί (kai). It appears primarily in the New Testament, especially in the book of Acts, and can mean 'and,' 'both,' or 'also.' Notably, it is used in verses like Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = et, ac, atque), not very freq. in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac.

τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (Bl., §77, 8): Mt 28:12, Jo 4:42, Ac 2:33, 37, 40 10:22 11:21, al.

Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Ac 26:16 Ro 14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Lk 12:45, Ac 1:1 15:9 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τέ, (as δέ comes fr. δή, μέν fr. μήν, so τέ fr. the adv. TH, prop. as; [al. ally it with καί, ef. Curtius $§ 27, 647; Vaniéek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat. § 195]), a copulative enclitie particle (on the use of which ef. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times; nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from the particle καί in that the latter is conjunctive, τέ adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Baéumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 145), καί introduces something new under the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas τέ marks it as…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τε (te) — and/both.

τε,

enclitic Particle, with two main uses (see. infr. A, B).

__A as a Conjunction,

__A.I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usually short in [Refs 8th c.BC+], longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ᾽ ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ᾽ ἀδικήσαντες κατ᾽ ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen.[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+], compare 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (which see); τε may be used three or more times…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τέ

te

a primary particle (enclitic) of connection or addition; both or also

(properly, as correlation of 2532):--also, and, both, even, then,

whether. Often used in composition, usually as the latter participle.

see GREEK for 2532

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τέ

Disj.prt.

and, both

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τε te 215x

enclitic, can function as a conj., serving either as a lightly-appending link, Acts 1:15; and, Acts 2:3; or as an inclusive prefix, Lk. 12:45; both, Lk. 24:20; Acts 26:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
37%then
then37% · 84×both35% · 79×and14% · 32×also11% · 26×other renderings3% · 6×

227 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject20%adverbial19%object13%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀνευρίσκωI find by seekinδιαγογγύζωI murmur greatlyφίλος
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πιστεύωI believe, have κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπᾶςall, the whole,
λέγωI say, speak
καρδίαthe heart, innerφυλακήa watching, guarθεόςGod, a god
πολύςmuch, many, often
σφόδραexceedingly, greἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemαὐτός
ἐν
ἐγώμάρτυςa witnessποιέωI do, make
τέthen209×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Ἕλληνa Hellene, a Greγυνήa woman, wife, mArticle the
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaulχώραregion, land, fiπόλιςa city
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakπεριαστράπτωI flash around l
πρός
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
γάρfor
θῆλυςfemaleἐπιθυμίαdesire, eagernesζάωI live

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτέ · 209× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews Romans Luke 1 Corinthians John Matthew 2 Corinthians James Ephesians Jude Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
τὴνho <the> G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ὕβρινhubris disaster G5196 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Mistreatment involves insolence or insult, causing harm or injury, as mentioned in 2 Corinthians 12:10.
Amplified meaning
harm, mistreatment
Tyndale gloss
mistreatment
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὕβρις (i.e., *hubris*) refers to wantonness, insolence, or acts of violence and injury. It encompasses a range of meanings from general insult and damage to specific legal contexts involving serious personal injuries. In the New Testament, it appears in 2 Corinthians 12:10 and Acts 27:10, 21, where it relates to harm and loss.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὕβρις, -εως, ἡ

[in LXX chiefly for גָּאוֹן and cogn. forms ;]

wantonness, insolence.

= ὕβρισμα, an act of wanton violence, an outrage, injury: II Co 12:10; metaph., of a loss by sea (Pind.), Ac 27:10, 21 (v. MM, xxv).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὕβρις, -ews, ἡ, (fr. ὑπέρ [(see Curtius p. 540); cf. Lat. superbus, Eng. ‘uppishness’]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for INI, M83, 171|, ete.; a. insolence ; impudence, pride, Aenclaiiees, b. a wrong springing from insolence, an injury, affront, insult [in Grk. usage the mental injury and the wantonness of its infliction being prominent; οἵ. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 12, 26; 2, 2, 5; see 2 Co. xii. 10 (Hesych. ὕβρεις glass or transparent like glass, glassy: Rey. iv. 6; xv. 2.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὕβρις. For this strong word (sce s.v. ὑβρίζω), cf. the marriage contract P Eleph 18 (B.c. 311-10) (= Selections, p. 3) where it is provided that the husband shall not bring in another woman ἐφ᾽ ὕβρει of his wife. See also P Fay 1217 (c. B.c. 103) ἤγαγον μεθ᾽ ὕβρεως καὶ πληγῶν, “they dragzed me away with insults and blows,” P Ryl II. 1361} (a.p. 34) ὕβριν por συνεστησάτωι οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν, ‘‘he subjected me to no common outrage’ (Edd.)—complaint of an assault, 26. 1458 (A.D. 38) πλείστας ὕβ[ρι]ς τοῖς παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ συντελῶν, ing insults on my dependants” (Edd.), P Oxy II. (A.D. 186) οἰόμενος ἐκ {τούγτου παύσασθαι αὐτὴν ἐμὲ ὕβρεων, ‘expecting that this would induce her her insults ” (Edd.). For ὕβρις as nearly always “ἃ sin of the strong and proud,” see Murray Greek Epic p. 264 ff: cf. Headlam Herodas, p. 86. “*heap2370-5 Tay eis to…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὕβρις (hubris) — mistreatment.

ὕβρις [ῠ

by nature, ῡ by position in Epic dialect etc.], ἡ, genitive εως [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ιος [Refs 8th c.BC+]:— wanton violence, arising from the pride of strength or from passion, insolence, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+], mostly of the suitors, μνηστήρων, τῶν ὕ. τε βίη τε σιδήρεον οὐρανὸν ἵκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θεοὶ.. ἀνθρώπων ὕβριν τε καὶ εὐνομίην ἐφορῶντες[Refs 8th c.BC+]; joined with ὀλιγωρίη, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: predicated of actions, ἆρ᾽ οὐχ ὕβρις τάδ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὕβρει in wantonness or insolence, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ὕβριν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. lust, lewdness, opposed to σωφροσύνη, [Refs 6th c.BC+]

3. of animals, violence, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὕβρις

hubris

from 5228; insolence (as over-bearing), i.e. insult, injury:--harm,

hurt, reproach.

see GREEK for 5228

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὕβρις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

insult, damage, loss

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὕβρις hybris 3x

insolence; shame, insult, outrage, 2 Cor. 12:10; damage by sea, Acts 27:10, 21*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὕβρις wantonness, wanton violence or insolence, Od., Hdt., etc.; of actions, ἆρ᾽ οὐχ ὕβρις τάδ᾽; Soph.; ταῦτ᾽ οὐχ ὕβρις ἐστί; Ar.:—adv. usages, ὕβρει in wantonness or insolence, Soph.; ἐφ᾽ ὕβρει Eur.; δι᾽ ὕβριν Dem.

of lewdness, opp. to σωφροσύνη. Theogn., Xen.

of over-fed horses, riotousness, restiveness, Hdt., Pind.

= ὕβρισμα, Hom.; sometimes like ὑβρίζω, foll. by a prep., Ἥρας μητέρ᾽ εἰς ἐμὴν ὕβρις her outrage towards . . , Eur.; ἡ κατ᾽ Ἀργείους ὕ. Soph.; ἡ πρὸς τοὺς δημότας ὕ. Hdt.; also c. gen. objecti, ὕ. τινός towards him, id. Hdt., etc.:—in pl. wanton acts, outrages, Hes., Eur., etc.

an outrage on the person, violation, Pind., attic

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%disaster
disaster67% · 2×insults33% · 1×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate33%object33%adverbial33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
μετά
ὅτιthat, since, bec
Article the
τέDisj
ἐν
ἀσθένειαwant of strength
ὕβριςdisaster
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
πολύςmuch, many, ofte
οὗτος
καίand, even, also,
ἐν
ἀνάγκηnecessity, const

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὕβρις · 3× in the New Testament
Acts 2 Corinthians
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 41 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 98c. AD 40

ἀνάγκη γὰρ εὐθὺς τὴν ἀπληστίας καὶ κόρου θυγατέρα γεννᾶσθαι ὕβριν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.60c. AD 75–95

οὐκ ἐπὶ νουθεσίᾳ δὲ τὴν κόλασιν ἔλαβεν, ἀλλʼ ἐπʼ αὐξήσει τῆς κακίας, ἡδονὴν μὲν πᾶσαν ἐκπορίζων αὐτοῦ τῷ σώματι, κἂν μεθʼ ὕβρεως τῶν συνόντων δέῃ ταύτην ἔχειν·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 26.11.8c. AD 140

εἶτα παρῆν ὁ ποιμήν, καὶ λέγει ταῖς παρθένοις: Μή τινα αὐτῷ ὕβριν πεποιήκατε;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD
P.Ryl. 2 136Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 34

οἰκίας λῃστρικῷ τρόπωι ποτηρίων κασσιτερίνων καὶ κελλίβατος καὶ ἄλλων σκευῶν καὶ ἀργυρίου δραχμῶν ξ ὕβριν μοι συνεστήσατο οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν. ἀξιῶ γραφῆναι τῶι τῆς κώμης ἀρχεφόδῳ καταστῆσαι ἐπὶ σὲ

P.Lond. 3 p. 130-131 no. 1218Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 39

γ ἔτους Γαίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Ἑλενοῦς Τοθέως πρὸς ἣν οὐκ εἴχον ἁπλῶς πρᾶγμα ὕβριν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν τῇ γυναικί μου … … συνετελέσατο … … … ρ

P.Mich. 5 228Areos Kome (Arsinoites)AD 47

ὧν ὀφείλει μοι ὀψωνίων καὶ μετρημάτων οὗτος οὖν μὴ βουλόμενος ἀποδοῦναι ἀλλὰ καὶ διαπλανῆσαι ὕβριν μοι ἐπετέλεσεν καὶ τῇ γυναικί μου Τανούρει Ἡρωνᾶτος ἐν τῇ δηλουμένῃ Ἄρεως Κώμης. ἔτι

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ταύτηνohutos this G3778 Demonstrative pronoun · accusative · singular · feminine
1,388× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This refers to a specific person or thing, like when Jesus says 'this is my body' in Matthew 26:26 and Mark 14:22.
Tyndale gloss
this/he/she/it
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὗτος (i.e., *houtos*) is a demonstrative pronoun meaning 'this' or 'this one.' It is used to refer to something nearby or recently mentioned, often with a connotation of contempt in certain contexts. In the New Testament, it appears in various forms, such as in Matthew 3:17 and John 1:15, and can also serve to emphasize or clarify a subject.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, gen., τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου,

[in LXX chiefly for זֶה, זֹאת;]

demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille),

this;

as subst., this one, he;

absol.: Mt 3:17, Mk 9:7, Lk 7:44, 45, Jo 1:15, Ac 2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mt 13:55, 56, Mk 6:2, 3, Jo 6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mk 1:38, Ro 14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jo 5:1), Jo 2:12 11:7, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demonstrative pron. [ef. Curtius p. 543], Hebr. 71, ΠΝ, this; used I. absolutely. 1. a. this one, visibly present here: Mt. iii. 17; xvii.5; Mk. ix. 7; Lk. vii. 44 sq.; ix. 35; 2 Pet.i.17. Mt.ix.3; xxi. 38; Mk. xiv. 69; Lk. 11. 34; xxiii. 2; Jn. i. 15, 30; vii. 25; ix. 8 54. 19; xviii. 21,50; xxi. 21; Actsii. 15; iv. 10; ix. 21; according to the nature and character of the person or thing mentioned, it is used with a suggestion —either of contempt, as Mt. xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. 2 sq.: Lk. v. 21; vii. 39,49; Jn. vi. 42,52; vii. 15; or of admiration, Mt. xxi. 11; Actsix.21; οἵ, Wahl, Clavis apocryphor. V. T. p- 370% b. it refers to a subject immediately preceding, the one just named: Lk. i. 32; ii. 37 [RGL]; Jn. i. 2; vi. 71; 2 Tim. iii. 6,8, ete.; at the beginning of a narrative about one already mentioned, Mt. iii. 3; Lk. xvi. 1; Jn. i. 41 (42); ili. 2; xii. 21; xxi.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οὗτος. A few of the prepositional phrases with this common demonstrative pron. may be illustrated διὰ τοῦτο, ‘on this account,” cf. P Ryl IT. 845 (a.p. 146) τὴν ἄνεσιν τὴν διὰ τοῦτο γενομένην τῶν ὑπαρχόντων, “the ensuing remission “ OUT@S, O’.TO@ of the lands’ (Edd.): ἐκ τούτου, ‘for this reason,’’ Jn 6° cf. 26. 81°4 (c, A.D, 104) ἐκ τούτου δὲ [φανεῖρόν ἐστιν [καὶ] μηδένα χρῇζειν, “‘it is evident from this that nobody wants it’’ (Edd.), BGU 11. 423!7 (ason to his father—ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 91) με ἐπαίδευσας καλῶς, Kal ἐκ τούτου ἐλπίζω ταχὺ προκόσί-- par τῶν θε[ῶ]ν θελόντων, “you have brought me up well, and for this reason I hope to be quickly promoted, if the gods will”: τούτου ἕνεκα, ‘‘ for this purpose,” cf. P Oxy I. 1138 (ii/a.p.) ἐὰν δ᾽ dpa μή, ; ἅμα τῷ vide μου ἐξέρχομαι τούτου ἕνεκα, “otherwise I and my son will come for this purpose’’ (Edd.): ἐπὶ τούτων, ““upon this,” ‘in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὗτος (ohutos) — this/he/she/it.

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο,

genitive τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual feminine never in Attic dialect, see ὁ, ἡ, τό, [near the start]:—demonstrative pronoun, this, common from [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο probably arose from a reduplication of the demonstrative ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of -υ- (= Sanskrit Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα from τα-υ-τα: Doric dialect genitive singular feminine τούτας [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc., the latter is uncertain in [Refs 5th c.BC+], as genitive singular neuter οὕτω [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; accusative singular feminine οὕταν [Refs 6th c.BC+] —In _Attic dialect_ οὗτος was frequently strengthened by the _demonstrative_ -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, _genitive_ τουτουί, _dative_ τουτῳί, _accusative_ τουτονί; plural nominative οὑτοιί, neuter ταυτί, etc., this man here…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο

Dem.pr.

this, he, she, it

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὗτος houtos 1x

this, this person or thing, Mt. 3:3, 9, 17; 8:9; 10:2; 24:34, et al. freq.; used by way of contempt, this fellow, Mt. 13:55; 27:47; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, this very thing, this same thing, 2 Cor. 2:3; 7:11; εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο, and elliptically, αὐτὸ τοῦτο, for this same purpose, on this account, Eph. 6:18, 22; 2 Pet. 1:5; καὶ οὗτος, and moreover, Lk. 7:12; 16:1; 20:30; καὶ τοῦτο, and that too, 1 Cor. 6:6, 8; tοῦτο μὲν ... τοῦτο δέ, partly ... partly, Heb.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

οὗτος demonstr. Pron. this, Lat. hic, to designate the nearer of two things, opp. to ἐκεῖνος, the more remote (cf. ὅδε), Hom., etc.

when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε generally refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes, Soph., etc.

so also, οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος (like Lat. ille) denotes praise, ὁ πάντ᾽ ἄναλκις οὗτος, i. e. Aegisthus, id. Soph.; οὗτος ἀνήρ Plat.; τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας id. Plat.

in attic law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff or defendant, whereas in Lat. hic was the client, iste the opponent, Dem.

often much like an adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ᾽ οὗτος κατὰ νῆας ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest . . ? Il.; often in attic, τίς οὑτοσί; who's this…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Dem-ASF — Demonstrative pronoun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

D-ASF Part of Speech: Demonstrative pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
55%this
this55% · 781×these things16% · 231×these14% · 196×he3% · 49×other renderings5% · 73×other renderings7% · 94×

1,424 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 49 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject36%object32%adverbial26%predicate4%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,388 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςδέbut, on the otheλέγωI say, speak
διά
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
ἐν
καίand, even, also,γάρforοὔτεNeg
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakεἰςγάρfor
ὅτιthat, since, because
λέγωI say, speakοἶδαI know, rememberγράφωI write
οὗτοςthis1388×
what comes after →
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, θεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅς
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theκατακρίνωI condemnεἰμίI am, exist
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakεἰμίI am, existαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
σύArticle theαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὗτος · 1,388× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 John 2 Peter

29 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 2,054 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
τὴνho <the> G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Much also time without food there being at that time having stood up <the> Paul in midst of them he said; It was necessary [for you] indeed, O men, having been obedient to me not to have set sail from <the> Crete, to have incurred then <the> disaster this and <the> loss.
ζημίαν.zēmia loss. G2209 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means damage or loss, like when Paul says he considers everything a loss compared to knowing Jesus in Philippians 3:8. It is the opposite of gain or profit. The Bible uses it to describe harm or detriment.
Amplified meaning
damage, injury
Tyndale gloss
damage/loss
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ζημία (zēmia) refers to damage or loss, often contrasted with gain or profit. It appears in the New Testament in contexts discussing detriment (Acts 27:10, 21; Philippians 3:7, 8). The term can also denote a financial penalty or fine, as seen in classical literature. Some sources note its usage in legal contexts, indicating a broader application beyond mere loss.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ζημία, -ας, ἡ,

[in LXX for ענשׁ ni. and cognate forms;]

damage, loss: Ac 27:10, 21, Phl 3:8; opp. to κέρδος, Phl 3:7.†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ζημία. For ζημία = ‘‘loss’’ as in all its NT occurrences (Ac 271021, Phil 378), cf. BGU I. 215 (a.D. 209) ὡς ἐκ τούτου καὶ οὐχ [ὀ]λ[(}γην ζη[μ]είαν por ἐζημιωσάμην, where note the not very common cognate acc. In Chrest. I. 176}8 (mid. i/A.D.) the lessee of a vineyard petitions that as he has spent so much on repairs he is entitled to abatement in rent—afo οὐκέτι εὐϊτον]ῶν ὑπομέν[ειν] τὰς ζημίας ἐπαναγκάσαι τοὺς πρ[ο]εστῶτας ἀπαρενόχλητόν με ποιῆσαι ὑπὲρ τῶ]ν φόρων, and in P Flor II. 1428 (iii/A.p.) where 2 asses are to be sold at such a price—dore μήτε τὸν πιπράσκοντα ζημιοῦσθαι μήτε ἡμᾶς ζημίαν πλείονα ὑπομένειν τῆς τιμῆς. Cf. Sy// 4188 (A.p. 238) μεγίστην ζημίαν (‘‘soloece pro dativo,” Dittenberger) τὸ ταμεῖον περιβληθήσεται, OG/S 4849 (1, 4.:».) συνέβαινεν δὲ πᾶσιν αἰσθητὴν γείνεσθαι τοῖς ὠνουμένοις τὴν ἄδικον τῶν πιπρασκόντων ζημίαν. The word is united with αἰτία in BGU IV. 1118”…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ζημία (zēmia) — damage/loss.

ζημία,

Doric dialect ζᾱμία [Refs 4th c.BC+], etc., later σαμία [Refs 2nd c.BC+], ἡ, loss, damage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to κέρδος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ζημίαν or -ίας λαβεῖν to sustain loss, [Refs 5th c.BC+][same place]; ζ. εἶναι νομίζειν consider as loss, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. ζ. ἐργάζεσθαι, of a slave, be guilty of a delict, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. penalty in money, fine, ζημίην ἀποτίνειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκτίνειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. generally, penalty, ζ. ἐπιτιθέναι τινί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with the penalty added, θάνατον ζ. ἐπιθέσθαι, προθεῖναι, τάξαι, to make death the penalty, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but ἐφ᾽ οἷς.. θάνατος ἡ ζ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] penalty for.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ζημία

zemia

probably akin to the base of 1150 (through the idea of violence);

detriment:--damage, loss.

see GREEK for 1150

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ζημία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

damage, loss

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ζημία zēmia 4x

damage, loss, detriment, Acts 27:10, 21; Phil. 3:7, 8*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ζημία loss, damage, Lat. damnum, opp. to κέρδος, Plat., etc.; ζημίαν λαβεῖν to sustain loss, Dem.

a penalty in money, a fine, mulct, ζημίην ἀποτίνειν Hdt.; ὀφείλειν id. Hdt.; καταβάλλειν Dem.; ζημία ἐπίκειται στατήρ a fine of a stater is imposed, Thuc.

generally a penalty, ζ. ἐπιτιθέναι τινί Hdt.; ζ. πρόσκειταί τινι Xen.; θάνατον ζημίαν ἐπιτίθεσθαι, προτιθέναι, τάττειν to make death the penalty, Thuc., etc.

φανερὰ ζαμία a mere good-for-nothing, a dead loss, Ar.

deriv. uncertain

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

chaTa "to suffer as one erring, or as a sinner" (Ge 31:39, where Jacob assures Laban that he (Jacob) suffered the loss of all animals of the flock torn by beasts); shekhol, "bereavement" (Isa 47:8 f, where the prophet foretells the humiliation of proud Babylon who shall suffer the loss of her children, and widowhood); shikkulim, "bereavement" (Isa 49:20, translated "bereavement" in the Revised Version (British and American), where the prophet promises to the desolate Zion enlargement). In the New Testament the translations of three Greek words: apobole, "casting away" (Ac 27:22, where Paul assures the crew and passengers that there shall be no "loss" of life from the…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%loss
loss100% · 4×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate50%object25%second object25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πολύςmuch, many, often
καίand, even, also,
Article the
καίand, even, also,
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἡγέομαιI lead, think
ζημίαloss.
what comes after →
οὐNeg
μόνοςalone, but, only
εἰμίI am, exist
διά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceζημία · 4× in the New Testament
Acts Philippians
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaThat the Worse Attacks the Better 142c. AD 40

εἰ δ’ ἕκαστον ὧν εἶπον ζημία τοῖς ἀπολειφθεῖσι γίνεται πρὸς αὐτῶν, πόσῃ τινὶ χρήσεσθαι κακοπραγίᾳ τοὺς ὑπὸ θεοῦ καταλειφθέντας γνωρίζομεν, οὓς ἀποστραφεὶς καθάπερ λιποτάκτας ἱερωτάτων θεσμῶν ἐξώρισεν ἀναξίους ἐπιστασίας καὶ ἀρχῆς τῆς ἑαυτοῦ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.267c. AD 75–95

ὥστʼ οὐδὲν ἐκώλυε καὶ Μωυσῆν, εἰ τοιούτῳ τινὶ συμπτώματι περὶ τὴν χρόαν ἢ τὸ σὺν αὐτῷ πλῆθος ἠλάττωτο, νομοθετῆσαι περὶ αὐτῶν τὰ κάλλιστα καὶ μηδεμίαν τοιαύτην ὁρίσαι ζημίαν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 5th c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 8th c. AD
Chrest.Wilck. 176Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 60

ἔξω τοῦ ἐλαιουργίου ὢν τοὺς φόρους ἐξ οἰκόθεν διαγράφειν, ἀξιῶ οὐκέτι εὐτονῶν ὑπομένειν τὰς ζημίας ἐπαναγκάσαι τοὺς προεστῶτας ἀπαρενόχλητόν με ποιῆσαι ὑπὲρ τῶν φόρων.

P.Oxy. 36 2754OxyrhynchosAD 111

τὰ ὀνόματα διδότωσαν τοῦ στρατηγοῦ παρακολουθοῦντος. οἱ δὲ πλαστοῖς ὑποδυόμενοι ὀνόμασιν οὐ χρηματικὴν πείσονται ζημίαν, τὸν τοῦ θεῶν ἐμφανεστάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Δακικοῦ πλανῶντες ἔλεον.…

P.Col. 6 123Tebtynis? (Arsinoites)AD 200

Μάρκος Αὐρήλιος Ἀντωνῖνος Σεβαστὸς Οὐλπίῳ Ἡρακλάνῳ τῷ καὶ Καλλινίκῳ τὰς ἐπιβληθείσας Ἀλεξανδρεῦσι ἢ Αἰγυπτίοις ζημίας τῇ δωρεᾷ χρόνον προσαγαγόντες ἀνήκαμεν. Ἀρτεμιδώρῳ τῷ καὶ Ἀχιλλεῖ. τοῖς ἐγνωσμένοις συνκαταθέμενος βραδέως μέμφῃ

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate